JP5689215B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine such as a coin gaming machine, for example. Specifically, it is possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is derived to a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a display result derived to the variable display device.

  This type of slot machine is equipped with a game control board provided with a game control means for controlling the game, and the game control board is composed of switches and the like that allow the player to proceed with the game. Electronic components are connected by a cable through a relay board.

  The cables connecting these electronic components and the game control board are generally separable by releasing the connection at the connector in order to facilitate the assembling work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. In addition, since electronic components are common components that can be used without changing even when changing models, they are fixed to the main body of the slot machine, and the game control board is replaced when a failure or model change occurs. Therefore, the game control board can be easily removed from the main body and replaced by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector provided on the game control board to release the connection.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board and the electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector is connected to the cable side. It is possible to easily connect the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool to the board-side connector by removing the connector.

  For example, the driving tool is used to operate various switches provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board to input / output a signal that simulates a signal input / output to / from the game control board from the various electronic components. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, at a gaming store, etc., the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. Is input / output to / from the game control board at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set the state where the special role is won.

  Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There was a risk that the fairness of this would be impaired.

In this type of slot machine, in order to prevent replacement with a harness (cable) to which unauthorized parts are connected, the slot machine has a harness insertion hole formed with a smaller diameter than the harness side connector, The connector cover that covers the connection between the side connector and the harness side connector is detachably attached to the board case that houses the control board so that the connector cannot be pulled out unless the connector cover or board case is destroyed. After connecting the board-side connector and the harness-side connector to each other (for example, see Patent Document 1), the lid of the board case is attached so as not to be removable together with the connector, and the connector is pulled out unless the board case is destroyed. Proposals have been made that cannot be made (for example, see Patent Documents 2 and 3).
JP 2006-198091 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-230652 JP 2006-230653 A

  However, although a fraud prevention method focusing on the connector connection portion of the game control board has been proposed in the past, it is possible to prevent fraud by considering a configuration in which the electronic component and the game control board are connected via a relay board. There were no proposals for methods.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can restrict the release of connection between a board-side connector and a cable-side connector at a game control board and a relay board. That is.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) It becomes possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during regular bonus) for one game using game values (medals, credits). The display result is derived to the variable display device that displays the identification information of the game in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) that can generate a prize according to the display result derived to the variable display device. ) And
A game control board on which a wiring pattern is formed and which has a connector (board-side connector 620a) that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and on which game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted (Game control board 40),
A production device for performing a predetermined production;
An effect control board that is communicably connected to the game control board and is equipped with effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect device based on reception of control information transmitted from the game control means,
A game that includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of a game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components (introduction medal sensor 31);
A relay board having a first connector (connector 621a) and a second connector (connector 622g) for connecting cables, and relaying signal input / output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board (Operation unit relay board 110);
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable (cable 600a) connected to
A second cable (cable 601g) having a connector connected to the second connector on the relay board side at one end, and the first electronic component connected to the other end;
The game control means includes
The microcomputer which comprises the said game control means has a storage area which memorize | stores the data for operation so that reading and writing are possible, and it is memorize | stored in this storage area even if the power supply to the said slot machine stops Game data storage means capable of holding data;
Prior determination means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a special winning accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player before the display result of the variable display device is derived When,
When the decision to permit the generation of any winning is made by the pre-determining means, the decision information indicating the decision to allow the occurrence of the winning is allocated to the storage area of the game data storage means Decision information setting means for setting in the determined decision information storage area;
Derivation control means for deriving the display result of the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
When the decision information setting means sets special decision information indicating the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize in the decision information storage area, and when the permitted special prize has not occurred, the special decision information Carry-over means to carry over after the next game,
Game storage data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the game data storage means is normal when the game control means is activated;
Game initialization means for initializing data stored in the game data storage means including the decision information storage area based on a predetermined initialization operation;
When the data stored in the game data storage means including the decision information storage area is initialized by the game initialization means, initialization information indicating the fact is given to the effect control means as the control information. Initialization information transmitting means for transmitting to
When the game storage data determination means determines that the data stored in the game data storage means is normal, the control state of the game control means based on the data stored in the game data storage means Game control state return processing means for executing game control state return processing for returning
Special determination state determination means for determining whether or not special determination information is stored in the determination information storage area when the game control state return processing means returns the control state of the game control means;
When the game control state return processing means returns the control state of the game control means, return information capable of specifying the determination result by the special determination state determination means is transmitted to the effect control means as the control information. Including return information transmitting means
The production control means includes
The microcomputer that constitutes the effect control means has a storage area for storing data for operation so as to be readable and writable, and is stored in the storage area even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped Production data storage means capable of holding data;
Effect storage data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the effect data storage means is normal when the effect control means is activated;
An effect initialization means for initializing the effect data storage means when it is determined by the effect storage data determination means that the data stored in the effect data storage means is not normal;
When the data stored in the effect data storage means is determined to be normal by the effect storage data determination means, the control state of the effect control means based on the data stored in the effect data storage means Effect control state return processing means for executing effect control state return processing for returning
After the production control means is activated, other control information different from the initialization information and the return information is received until the initialization information or the return information transmitted at the time of activation of the game control means is received. However, the control state of the effect control unit is set on the condition that the control unit waits without performing control according to the other control information and receives the initialization information or the return information transmitted from the game control unit. Output starting means for starting the output of the production by the production device based on,
Notification control for receiving the return information and informing the effect device that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted when the return information specifies that the special decision information is stored. And a start-up notification control means for performing
Connector connection part (connector 620a, connector 610a part) between the first cable and the game control board, connector connection part (connector 611a, connector 621a part) between the first cable and the relay board, and the second cable each of the connector connecting portion between the relay substrate (connector 622 g, the connector 612g portion) is adapted to disconnect the restricted state is impossible released unless destroying the release restriction sites related to the connector (the connector regulating member 500 650) ,
The first electronic component connected to the second cable whose connector connection portion with the relay board is in the connection release restricted state outputs a signal for starting the variable display on the variable display device according to the operation. This is a start operation means .

  According to such a configuration, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the game control board, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the relay board, and a connector connection between the second cable and the relay board. Each of the portions is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connector connection is destroyed, so in any of the three connector connection parts on the game control board and the relay board, Unauthorized devices such as driving tools cannot be connected without leaving traces. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible.

( 2 ) The stage device includes a light-emitting component and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction.
The effect control means is movable so as to change the direction of light irradiation to a direction (inward) directed toward a player playing a game in the slot machine and a direction directed outward (outward) from the player direction. Control for moving the parts is performed (see FIG. 38C, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the light effect can be performed on the player side of the slot machine and the other player side adjacent to the slot machine. The production effect can be enhanced.

( 3 ) The rendering device includes a light-emitting component and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction.
The effect control means performs control to cause the light-emitting component to emit light in a lighting manner corresponding to the irradiation direction of light that is changed by the movable component (see Modification (2)).

  According to such a configuration, the light emitting component can be made to emit light most effectively in accordance with the light irradiation direction, so that the light effect can be enhanced efficiently according to the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

( 4 ) The rendering device includes a light-emitting component and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction.
The slot machine includes a main unit (for example, a housing and a front door) that is commonly used among a plurality of models, and an effect unit (effect device) that is installed in an installation section provided in the main unit and is used for each model. 179), and
The light emitting component and the movable component are attached to the effect unit (see FIG. 1 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, when changing the model of the slot machine, it is not necessary to replace the main unit of the slot machine, and the rendering unit can be removed and replaced with another unit. For this reason, the cost of model change can be reduced, and replacement work can be easily performed.

(5) the presentation device may include an electrical component for directing said attached to the body unit (reel LED162a～162i, side lamp 160, 161, etc.),
The effect control means outputs a control signal (lamp control signal, motor control signal) in a serial signal system in order to control the light-emitting component and / or the movable part and the effect electrical component. CPU 91a, serial output circuit 132),
The slot machine further converts the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputs conversion output means (conversion IC) for outputting to the connected electrical parts for production. (Panel IC substrate 171, frame IC substrate 172, etc. in the first embodiment);
An effect unit conversion output circuit (in the first embodiment), which is equipped with conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method and outputting the converted light signal to the light-emitting component and / or the movable component. And an IC board 170 for a production device,
The output means outputs the control signal to each of the conversion output means mounted in the main body unit conversion output circuit and the rendering unit conversion output circuit, and converts the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system. Then, a specifying signal (address information) for specifying the conversion output means to be output is output to each of the conversion output means mounted in the main body unit conversion output circuit and the effect unit conversion output circuit (FIG. 35). See Fig. 37),
The conversion output means mounted in the main unit conversion output circuit and the rendering unit conversion output circuit respectively determine whether or not the conversion output means is a conversion output means specified from the specifying signal. (Header / address detection unit 653 in FIG. 7),
The conversion output means determined not to be the conversion output means specified from the specifying signal does not output the control signal input together with the specifying signal to the connected component (outputs the latch signal to the data buffer 655). Without discarding the data stored in the shift register 652 without outputting it to the data buffer 655),
The conversion output means determined to be the conversion output means specified from the specifying signal converts the control signal input together with the specifying signal from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method and is connected to a connected component. (The latch signal is output to the data buffer 655, and the 20th to 27th bits of data from the head corresponding to the data portion are fetched and latched from the shift register 652. The data buffer 655 then latches the fetched data (Supplied to electrical components connected as parallel data (Q0 to Q7)).

  According to such a configuration, since the output means and the rendering unit conversion output circuit are communicated in a serial signal system, the number of wires between the output means and the rendering unit conversion output circuit can be reduced. Also, even if the production unit is replaced with a unit that is equipped with an electrical component different from the light-emitting component or drive component, the same cable can be used if the unit is equipped with a circuit equivalent to the production unit conversion output circuit. Can be used to connect the unit to the output means. For this reason, the replacement work required for removing the effect unit and replacing it with another unit can be further facilitated.

  In addition, the effect control means mentioned above may be mounted on the main unit side or may be mounted on the effect unit side (see Modification (39)).

(6) the presentation device may include an electrical component for directing said attached to the body unit (reel LED162a～162i, side lamp 160, 161, etc.),
The effect control means is an output means (CPU 91a, serial output) for outputting a control signal (control signal sequence) in a serial signal system in order to control the light-emitting component and / or the movable component and the electric component for effect. Circuit 132),
The slot machine further converts the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputs conversion output means (conversion IC) for outputting to the connected electrical parts for production. (Panel IC substrate 171, frame IC substrate 172, etc. in the second embodiment),
A conversion output circuit for a production unit equipped with a conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputting it to the connected light emitting component and / or the movable component (in the second embodiment) And an IC board 170 for a production device,
The output means includes
A main unit output means (second and third systems of the serial output circuit 132) for outputting a control signal for controlling the effect electrical parts to the main unit conversion output circuit in a serial signal system;
Production unit output means (first system of serial output circuit 132) for outputting a control signal for controlling the light emitting component and / or the movable component in a serial signal system to the production unit conversion output circuit. ,
At least the conversion output means mounted in the production unit conversion output circuit is connected in series with the same system (first system) wiring (see FIG. 59),
The production unit output means has fixed length data (control signal string) including control signal information for controlling all the components connected to the conversion output means of the same system in a predetermined unit (1 (Bit)) for each predetermined period (clock signal) in the serial signal system and output to the highest level conversion output means (in the first system, conversion IC 170a) (Ss972A in FIG. 63),
The conversion output means of the same system respectively transfer a predetermined unit of control signal input every predetermined cycle as it is to the conversion output means connected to the lower side, and input the predetermined unit of control signal. Parallel from the serial signal system at a predetermined timing (when a latch signal output at the timing after the output of the control signal sequence is input and when a preset time elapses after the control signal is input) It converts into a signal system and outputs to the connected components (refer FIG. 60).

  According to such a configuration, since the output means and the rendering unit conversion output circuit are communicated in a serial signal system, the number of wires between the output means and the rendering unit conversion output circuit can be reduced. Also, even if the production unit is replaced with a unit that is equipped with an electrical component different from the light-emitting component or drive component, the same cable can be used if the unit is equipped with a circuit equivalent to the production unit conversion output circuit. Can be used to connect the unit to the output means. For this reason, the replacement work required for removing the effect unit and replacing it with another unit can be further facilitated.

  In addition, the effect control means mentioned above may be mounted on the main unit side or may be mounted on the effect unit side (see Modification (39)).

( 7 ) a board case (board case 200) for housing the game control board;
The game control board side connector (board side connector 620a) and the first cable connector (cable side connector 610a) which are provided separately from the board case and are attached to the board case. A restricting member (connector restricting member 500) that cannot be released from
Unless the predetermined removal restricting portion (sealing piece 232) is destroyed, the main body of the slot machine and the board case are connected so that the board case cannot be removed from the main body (mounting base 250) of the slot machine. Connecting means (one-way screw)
By connecting the substrate case and the main body of the slot machine by the connecting means, a restricting member removal restricting means for restricting removal of the restricting member from the substrate case is configured.

  According to such a configuration, the cable-side connector is connected to the board-side connector in a state where the attachment-side member is attached to the board case, and then the special member is attached to the attachment-side member to be integrated, thereby configuring the restriction member By doing so, the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case cannot be released, and in this state, the board case and the main body of the slot machine are coupled by the coupling means. The removal of the restriction member from the board case will be restricted, and the connection from the board side connector to the cable side connector will not be made unless the removal restriction part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released. Cannot be released. In other words, the cable-side connector cannot be separated from the board case without leaving a trace of destruction of the removal restricting portion, and an illegal instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. Also, when replacing the board together with the board case containing the board due to a failure or the like, if the removal restricting part is destroyed and the connection between the board case and the slot machine body is released, the restriction member is removed from the board case. Since the connection between the cable-side connector and the board-side connector can be released, the cable-side connector can be separated from the board-side connector and removed from the body of the slot machine together with the board-side connector without damaging the regulating member. It becomes. On the other hand, when replacing only the cable, it is possible to release the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector by destroying the separation restriction part and removing the special member, so that the board case is not wasted. The cable side connector can be separated from the board side connector, and the cable can be removed from the board case.

( 8 ) a mounting portion (locking hole portion 513) provided at a peripheral position of the connector on the game control board side;
When attached to the attachment portion, a special member (connector cover 520) that cannot be separated from the attachment portion unless the predetermined separation regulating portion (connection piece 522a) is destroyed,
By attaching the special member to the attachment portion (locking hole portion 513) in a state where the connector on the first cable side (cable side connector 610a) is connected to the connector on the game control board side (board side connector 620a). A part (covering portion 521) of the special member (connector cover 520) is arranged at a position overlapping the connector direction (cable side connector 610a) on the first cable side, and the connector (cable on the first cable side) The movement of the side connector 610a) in the pulling direction is restricted.

  According to such a configuration, after the cable-side connector is connected to the board-side connector, only the special member is attached to the mounting portion provided around the board-side connector, and a part of the special member is attached to the cable-side connector. Since it overlaps in the disconnection direction and the movement of the cable-side connector in the disconnection direction is restricted, the assembly work can be reduced when the release of the connection between the cable-side connector and the board-side connector is restricted. Further, for example, even when the game control board is housed in the board case, it is only necessary to connect the cable-side connector to the board-side connector as it is, and then attach a special member to the mounting portion. In such a case, in restricting the release of the connection between the cable side connector and the board side connector, the assembling work can be more effectively reduced. In addition, once the special member is attached to the attachment portion, it cannot be removed unless the separation restricting portion is destroyed, so that it is impossible to connect an illegal instrument such as a driving instrument without leaving a trace.

  Further, the mounting portion may be provided at a peripheral position of the board-side connector, may be provided on the game control board itself, or may be provided on a board case that accommodates the game control board. It may be provided, or may be provided on a member attached to the game control board or the board case.

First Embodiment Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door pivotally supported at a side end of the housing. The main unit includes a housing and a front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are “melon”, “grape”, “banana”, “cherry”, “star”, “red 7 (black in FIG. 2). No. 7) "," White 7 (white 7 in FIG. 2) ", and" BAR "are drawn in a predetermined order, each of 21 types of multiple types of symbols. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a reel sensor 33 that detects a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the upper, middle, and lower positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with white light from the back Reel LEDs 162a to 162i to be irradiated are provided.

  Further, side lamps 160 and 161 are provided on the left and right sides of the see-through window 3. The side lamps 160 and 161 are each composed of two LEDs 160a to 160c and 161a to 161c and cover members 160 'and 161' made of a transparent member. Since the side lamp 160 and the side lamp 161 have the same structure, an example of the structure of the side lamp 160 will be described below as a representative example.

  The side lamp 160 is assembled such that, for example, the LEDs 160a to 160c are attached at predetermined positions and the front side thereof is covered with a cover member 160 '. The side lamp 160 lights the LEDs 160a to 160c in a predetermined lighting mode based on a control signal input from the drive circuit 93 according to the gaming state.

  Although the side lamp 160 has been described above, the side lamp 161 mounted on the right side of the side has the same structure, and the LEDs 161a to 161 are based on the control signal input from the drive circuit 93 according to the gaming state. 161c is lit.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal gaming state described later in this embodiment) (Also called the initial gaming state), RT (replay time) 1 to 5 is set, 3 in the regular bonus described later 1) MAXBET switch 6 that is operated, medal and bet number stored as credit The checkout switch 10 operated when the medals used for setting are set up (returning medals used for setting credits and bets) and the game Browsing and initialization of game history data relating to already played games, start switch 7 operated when starting, stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R operated when stopping rotation of reels 2L, 2C and 2R, respectively A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 that are operated when selecting the production mode are provided so as to be operable by the player. A winning combination panel 89 on which a combination of symbols constituting a plurality of types of winning combinations is written is attached to the front door.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is turned on, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set 2 is turned on, and that the bet number is set to 3 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  A rendering device 179 is mounted on the upper part of the front door. The effect unit includes an effect device 179. In the center of the effect device 179, a liquid crystal display 51 having a display screen for performing various effects related to the game is arranged. In addition, on the left and right sides of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, there are provided effect driving lamps 182 to 187 that perform effects by light in various patterns according to the progress of the game. The effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are configured to be able to change the irradiation direction of light from the LEDs. Further, effect lamps 180 and 181 that are lit in a manner corresponding to the gaming state are provided above and below the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. Note that the emission colors of the various lamps may be a single color or a plurality of colors. Various lamps may emit light depending on the type of winning combination.

  Here, the structure of the rendering device 179 will be described. The effect device 179 includes effect drive lamps 182 to 187, effect lamps 180 and 181, a liquid crystal display 51, and a rectangular base member 179 ′ that holds these. The base member 179 ′ is formed with a see-through window through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 can be seen through in the center, and an attachment portion for attaching the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 is formed on the left side. In addition, mounting portions for mounting the effect driving lamps 185 to 187 are formed on the right side, and mounting portions for mounting the effect lamps 180 and 181 are formed on the upper and lower portions. . The rendering device 179 is configured by attaching the above-described various members to a base member 179 '.

  First, the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 will be described. The lamps 182 to 187 for effect driving are LEDs 182a to 187a, reflectors 182d to 187d that are provided in association with the LEDs and reflect light from the LEDs in a predetermined direction, and the LEDs and the reflectors are integrally driven to rotate. Motors 182b to 185b (see FIG. 3) serving as driving sources to be driven, and sensors 182c to 185c (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotational drive status.

  The effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are controlled by the same operation pattern (including the lighting mode and the driving mode), respectively, and the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 attached to the left side are attached to the right side. The effect driving lamps 185 to 187 are controlled with the same operation pattern (including lighting mode and driving mode). Since the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 and the effect driving lamps 185 to 187 have the same structure, an example of the structure of the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 will be described below as a representative example.

  The effect driving lamps 182 to 184 are assembled such that, for example, the LEDs 182a to 184a are attached at predetermined positions, and the reflectors 182d to 184d are rotationally driven by the motors 182b and 183b on the front side.

  Each of the reflectors 182d to 184d has a hollow portion provided with an insertion hole for allowing the LED 182a to the LED 184a to be inserted therethrough. The reflecting umbrellas 182d to 184d are attached to the base member 179 'so that the direction of the reflecting umbrella (irradiation direction of light reflected by the reflecting umbrella) can be freely changed around the insertion hole. ing. Light from the LEDs 182a to 184a is reflected in the direction according to the direction of the reflectors 182d to 184d through the insertion holes.

  The motor 182b, the motor 183b, and the reflectors 182d to 184d are, for example, the reflector 182d to 184d is driven upward by rotating the motor 182b forward, and the reflector 182d to 184d is reversely rotated by rotating the motor 182b. Are driven to the left by driving the motor 183b forward to rotate the reflectors 182d to 184d toward the left, and by rotating the motor 183b in the reverse direction to the right toward the reflectors 182d to 184d. It is assembled to drive in the direction.

  Therefore, for example, when the reflecting umbrellas 182d to 184d are driven to rotate counterclockwise, the reflecting blades 182d to 184d are driven upward by rotating the motor 182b forward (uppermost), and then the motor 182b is moved. The reverse rotation and the motor 183b are rotated forward to drive the reflectors 182d to 184d in the left direction (leftmost), and the rotation direction of the motor 182b is maintained as it is, and the motor 183b is rotated in the reverse direction to reflect the reflectors 182d to 184d. Is driven downward (lowermost), the rotation direction of the motor 183b is maintained as it is, the motor 182b is rotated forward to drive the reflectors 182d to 184d to the right (rightmost), and further the rotation of the motor 182b Keep the direction as it is and rotate the motor 183b forward so that the reflectors 182d to 184d Is driven in the direction (uppermost) is carried out by.

  Thus, by driving the motors 182b and 183b, the orientation of the reflectors 182d to 184d can be freely adjusted, and the irradiation direction of the light from the LEDs 182a to 184a can be freely changed.

  When the reflectors 182d to 184d are directed to the leftmost direction, the light irradiation direction from the LEDs 182a to 184a is shifted to the left side from the front of the slot machine (for example, in a slot machine provided on the left side). Direction of the player who is playing the game.

  The sensor 182c is attached so as to detect that the reflectors 182d to 184d are in the center position in the vertical direction. Thereby, by detecting with the sensor 182c, it can identify that the reflectors 182d to 184d are the center positions in the vertical direction. The sensor 183c is attached so as to detect that the reflectors 182d to 184d are in the center position in the left-right direction. Thereby, it can identify that the reflector 182d-184d is a center position in the left-right direction by detecting with the sensor 182c. Moreover, it can identify | isolate that the reflectors 182d-184d are the center positions in the left-right up-down direction by detecting by both the sensors 182c and 183c. The center position in the horizontal direction is called the initial position. The detection signals from the sensors 182c and 183c are input to the drive circuit 93 mounted on the effect control board 90 as will be described later.

  The effect driving lamps 182 to 184 turn on the LEDs 182a to 184a in a predetermined lighting mode and drive the motors 182b and 183b in a predetermined driving mode based on a control signal input from the driving circuit 93 according to the gaming state. The reflectors 182d to 184d are rotated.

  As described above, the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 have been described, but the effect driving lamps 185 to 187 attached to the right side toward the right have the same structure and are input from the drive circuit 93 according to the gaming state. Based on the signal, the LEDs 185a to 187a are turned on, and the motors 184b and 185b are driven to rotate the reflectors 185d to 187d.

  Here, an example of the structure of the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 has been described. However, the structure is not limited to this, and the LEDs 182a to 187a are turned on and the motors 182b to 185b are driven to reflect the umbrellas 182d to 182d. What is necessary is just to assemble | attach so that 187d can be rotationally driven and can change the irradiation direction of the light from LED182a-LED187a by changing the direction of reflector 182d-187d.

  Next, the effect lamps 180 and 181 will be described. First, the effect lamps 180 and 181 are each composed of five LEDs 180a to 180e and 181a to 181e, and cover members 180 'and 181' made of a transparent member. Since the effect lamp 180 and the effect lamp 181 have the same structure, an example of the structure of the effect lamp 180 will be described below as a representative example.

  The effect lamp 180 is assembled such that, for example, the LEDs 180a to 180e are attached at predetermined positions and the front side thereof is covered with a cover member 180 '. The effect lamp 180 lights the LEDs 180a to 180e in a predetermined lighting mode based on a control signal input from the drive circuit 93 according to the gaming state.

  Although the effect lamp 180 has been described above, the effect lamp 181 attached below has the same structure, and the LEDs 181a to 181e are turned on based on the control signal input from the drive circuit 93 according to the gaming state. Is configured to do.

  The liquid crystal display 51 is attached to the rear side so that the display screen faces a see-through window formed in the base member 179 '.

  The effect device 179 configured by attaching various members in this way is configured such that the effect driving lamps 182 to 187, the effect lamps 180 and 181 and the liquid crystal display 51 are assembled to the base member 179 ′. It is configured as a unit. And the production | presentation apparatus 179 is attached to the upper part of a front door as integral.

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, a setting value described later is being changed. And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensor 33, reel unit including the reel LEDs 162a to 162i (not shown), and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are inserted. A hopper tank (not shown) to be stored, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout port 9, a payout sensor 35 for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34, and a power supply box (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, The five types of winning lines L4 are set in the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set across the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, and the winning line L5 is set up in the middle of the symbols of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT5, when a specified number of bets are set, all of the winning lines L1 to L5 are valid, and in the regular bonus Only winning the bet number of prescribed number is set lines L1, L2 is valid.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, a combination of symbols) on any activated pay line (hereinafter referred to as an effective line). (Also referred to as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R), a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. . Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of active lines, the number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the effective line is totaled, and the total number of medals is It will be given to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any active line, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. ing.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  In particular, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, voltages are supplied to at least a sub control unit 91 (CPU 91a) described later and a display control circuit 92 described later, among power supply lines that supply the voltage generated by the power supply substrate 100 to each unit. A power supply line for supplying power, a power supply line for supplying voltage to a liquid crystal drive circuit 215 (described later) mounted on the liquid crystal display 51, a power supply line for supplying voltage to a drive circuit 93 (described later), and an audio output circuit 94 (described later). A power supply line for supplying voltage is wired electrically independently.

  Note that electrically independent wiring means that these wiring lines are provided in an electrically non-contact state even when wired on the same cable or the same substrate.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply voltage supplied to slot machine 1 A power interruption detection circuit 48 that monitors and detects a voltage drop when the voltage drop is detected, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 41a, the CPU 41a A serial output circuit 41A configured by a reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal, a shift register, etc., converting an effect control command into serial data and transmitting it to the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and other various devices and circuits. It is installed.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not shown in particular, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 The power interruption processing is executed according to the external interrupt.

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all the output ports are initialized, the RAM parity is calculated based on all the data stored in the RAM, set in the parity storage area 41c-7 (see FIG. 14), and the RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area 41c-7, and by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup, It is possible to confirm whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The CPU 41a converts various effect control commands into serial data via the serial output circuit 41A and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 90. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. Transmission lines for commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected. . The effect relay board 80 is a board provided to ensure one-way information transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90. The effect relay board 80 does not check the game control board 40 or the effect control board 90 by checking this state, and thus an illegal signal (especially an input to the effect control board 90 from the outside) is sent to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40. In other words, it is possible to check whether or not modification has been made so that the signal is input).

  On the effect control board 90, a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1, speakers 53 and 54, LEDs 180a to 180e, 181a to 181e, LEDs 182a to 187a, motors 182b to 185b, reels Electrical components such as LEDs 162a to 162i, LEDs 160a to 160c, and 161a to 161c are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. It has become.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the selection switch 56, the determination switch 57, and the sensors 182c to 185c described above, and detection signals from these connected switches and sensors are input. .

  Like the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer including a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a sub-control unit 91 for effect control, the received effect control command Is converted into parallel data and input to the CPU 91a via the I / O port 91d, a display control circuit 92 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90, and LEDs and motors. A drive circuit 93 that performs drive control and detects detection signals input from switches and sensors, a sound output circuit 94 that performs sound output control from the speakers 53 and 54, a constant initialization command from the power-on or CPU 91a A reset circuit 9 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when no time is input A clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a is connected to the effect control command and the effect control board 90 transmitted from the game control board 40. In response to the detection of the switches and sensors, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The CPU 91a generates an interrupt, acquires an effect control command from the main control unit 41, and executes a command reception interrupt process stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a interrupts the process when an interrupt occurs even if the interrupt process based on other interrupts other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub) is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if other interrupts except for the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Here, the drive circuit 93 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the drive circuit 93. The drive circuit 93 converts the control signal output for the CPU 91a to drive and control the LED and the motor from parallel data to serial data, and outputs the parallel detection signal input from the switches and sensors. A serial input circuit 131 that converts the data into the CPU 91a, a clock signal output unit 130 for outputting a clock signal, and an input capture signal for latching the detection signal of the switch / sensor in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 91a are output. And an input capture signal output unit 133.

  The drive circuit 93 includes a control signal (data) from the serial output circuit 132, an input capture signal (for switch and sensor) from the input capture signal output unit 133, and a clock signal from the clock signal output unit 130. Is output to the relay board 90a, and a detection signal (input signal) from the relay board 90a is input by the serial input circuit 131.

  The drive circuit 93 and the relay board 90a include a signal line for control signals, a signal line for clock signals, a signal line for input capture signals (for switches and sensors), and a signal line for detection signals Are electrically connected by one cable having at least.

  In FIG. 3, the clock signal is indicated by a dotted line, the input signal is indicated by a one-dot chain line, the control signal is indicated by a bold solid line, and the input capture signal is indicated by a long dotted line. In the following drawings, the line types corresponding to various signals are similarly shown.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the relay board 90a has a serial-parallel conversion IC that converts serial data into parallel data or a parallel-serial conversion IC that converts parallel data into serial data (these are collectively referred to as a conversion IC). Are connected to the effect device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171, and the frame IC substrate 172.

  The effect device IC board 170 is mounted on the effect device 179 and is integrally formed. The effect device IC board 170 converts serial data input from the relay board 90a into parallel data, and includes LEDs 180a to 180e, 181a to 181e, LEDs 182a to 187a, and motors 182b to 185b mounted on the effect device 179. A serial-parallel conversion IC for driving and a parallel-serial conversion IC for converting detection signals from the sensors 182c to 185c into serial data and outputting them to the relay board 90a are mounted.

  The panel IC board 171 is mounted on the housing side, and is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data input from the relay board 90a into parallel data and driving the reel LEDs 162a to 162i.

  The frame IC board 172 is mounted on the front frame side, converts serial data input from the relay board 90a into parallel data, and drives the LEDs 160a to 160c and 161a to 161c of the side lamps 160 and 161. A serial-parallel conversion IC and a parallel-serial conversion IC for converting detection signals from the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 into serial data and outputting the serial data to the relay board 90a are mounted.

  Here, the conversion ICs mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram for explaining conversion ICs mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172, respectively.

  The control signal (data) from the serial output circuit 132 of the drive circuit 93 and the clock signal from the clock signal output unit 130 described in FIG. 3 are branched by the relay substrate 90a, and the effect device IC substrate 170, panel Are output to the IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172, respectively. Also, the sensor input capture signal from the input capture signal output unit 133 of the drive circuit 93 is output to the effect device IC substrate 170 via the relay substrate 90a. In addition, the switch input acquisition signal from the input acquisition signal output unit 133 of the drive circuit 93 is output to the frame IC substrate 172 via the relay substrate 90a. The detection signals from the rendering device IC board 170 and the frame IC board 172 are input to the serial input circuit 131 of the drive circuit 93 via the relay board 90a.

  The relay substrate 90a and the rendering device IC substrate 170 have at least a signal line for control signals, a signal line for clock signals, a signal line for input capture signals, and a signal line for detection signals. Are electrically connected by a cable 173 for the production device.

  Conversion device 170a-170d which converts the input serial data into parallel data and supplies it to connected components is mounted on the rendering device IC board 170, and the detection signal is converted into serial data by receiving the input capture signal. A conversion IC 170e that converts the signal into the signal and outputs it to the drive circuit 93 side is mounted.

  The wiring for transmitting the control signal (data) input from the relay board 90a is connected to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d in a bus form on the rendering device IC board 170, and is supplied to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d. (Refer to the solid line on the effect device IC substrate 170 in FIG. 5).

  Also, the wiring for transmitting the clock signal input from the relay board 90a is connected to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170e in a bus form on the effect device IC board 170, and is patterned so as to be supplied to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170e. (Refer to the dotted line on the IC board 170 for effect device in FIG. 5).

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the input signal for sensor input from the relay board 90a is patterned so as to be connected to and supplied to the conversion IC 170e on the IC board 170 for the rendering apparatus (the rendering apparatus of FIG. 5). (Refer to the long dotted line on the IC substrate 170).

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the conversion IC is patterned so as to be supplied to the relay substrate 90a on the effect device IC substrate 170 (the alternate long and short dash line on the effect device IC substrate 170 in FIG. 5). reference).

  The effect device cable 173 that connects the relay substrate 90a and the effect device IC board 170 may be any cable having one signal line for each signal. For this reason, the number of wiring of the cable 173 for direction devices can be reduced.

  The relay substrate 90a and the panel IC substrate 171 are electrically connected by one panel cable 174 having at least a control signal signal line and a clock signal signal line.

  Conversion ICs 171a and 171b for converting input serial data into parallel data and supplying them to connected components are mounted on the panel IC substrate 171.

  A wiring for transmitting a control signal (data) input from the relay board 90a is connected to each of the conversion ICs 171a and 171b in a bus form on the panel IC board 171 and is patterned to be supplied to each of the conversion ICs 171a and 171b. (Refer to the solid line on the panel IC substrate 171 in FIG. 5).

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the clock signal input from the relay board 90a is connected to the conversion ICs 171a and 171b in a bus form on the panel IC board 171 and is patterned to be supplied to the conversion ICs 171a and 171b. (See the dotted line on the panel IC substrate 171 in FIG. 5).

  The panel cable 174 that connects the relay board 90a and the panel IC board 171 may be a cable having one signal line for each signal. For this reason, the number of wirings of the panel cable 174 can be reduced.

  The relay substrate 90a and the frame IC substrate 172 include at least a signal line for control signals, a signal line for clock signals, a signal line for input capture signals, and a signal line for detection signals. They are electrically connected by a frame cable 175.

  The frame IC board 172 is equipped with a conversion IC 172a that converts the input serial data into parallel data and supplies it to the connected components, and receives the input capture signal to convert the detection signal into serial data. A conversion IC 172b that outputs to the drive circuit 93 side is mounted.

  The wiring for transmitting the control signal (data) input from the relay substrate 90a is patterned on the frame IC substrate 172 so as to be connected to the conversion IC 172a (on the frame IC substrate 172 in FIG. 5). (See solid line).

  The wiring for transmitting the clock signal input from the relay board 90a is connected to each of the conversion ICs 172a and 172b in a bus form on the frame IC board 172, and is patterned to be supplied to each of the conversion ICs 172a and 172b. (Refer to the dotted line on the frame IC substrate 172 in FIG. 5).

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the input signal for the switch input from the relay board 90a is patterned on the frame IC board 172 so as to be connected to the conversion IC 172b (for the frame in FIG. 5). (Refer to the long dotted line on the IC substrate 172).

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the conversion IC is patterned on the frame IC substrate 172 so as to be supplied to the relay substrate 90a (see the one-dot chain line on the frame IC substrate 172 in FIG. 5). .

  The frame cable 175 that connects the relay substrate 90a and the frame IC substrate 172 may be a cable having one signal line for each signal. For this reason, the number of wires of the frame cable 175 can be reduced.

  Next, electrical components (LEDs, motors) connected to the conversion ICs 170a to 170e, 171a, 171b, 172a, 172b mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172. , Switches, sensors, etc.) will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining electrical components connected to the conversion ICs 170a to 170e, 171a, 171b, 172a, and 172b.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the electrical components connected to the conversion ICs 170a to 170e. Five LEDs 180a to 180e constituting the effect lamp 180 are connected to the conversion IC 170a. Five LEDs 181a to 181e constituting the effect lamp 181 are connected to the conversion IC 170b. Six LEDs 182a to 187a constituting the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are connected to the conversion IC 170c. Four motors 182b to 185b constituting the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are connected to the conversion IC 170d. Four sensors 182c to 185c constituting the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are connected to the conversion IC 170e.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining electrical components connected to the conversion ICs 171a and 171b. To the conversion IC 171a, six reel LEDs 162a to 162f arranged at positions corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are connected. Connected to the conversion IC 171b are three reel LEDs 162g to 162i arranged at positions corresponding to the upper, middle and lower stages of the right reel 2R.

  FIG. 6C is a diagram for explaining the electrical components connected to the conversion ICs 172a and 172b. Six LEDs 160a to 160c and 161a to 161c constituting a side lamp are connected to the conversion IC 172a. A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 are connected to the conversion IC 172b.

  The conversion ICs mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172 and the electrical components connected thereto have been described above with reference to FIGS. At least the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a among the conversion ICs are set with unique IDs (addresses). For example, as shown in FIG. 5, the address of the conversion IC 170a is 01, the address of the conversion IC 170b is 02,..., The address of the conversion IC 172a is 08. The unique address may be the same as the unique ID of the conversion IC, or may include numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the conversion IC.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 described above serially transmits a control signal including control information for driving and controlling the electrical component connected to the conversion IC and address information of the conversion IC to which the electrical component to be controlled is connected. Output to the output circuit 132. In the serial output circuit 132, a control signal including control information and address information input from the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 is converted into serial data and output to all the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a.

  The conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a determine whether the address information specified from the input serial data is the address of the conversion IC. Then, the conversion IC determined to match converts the control information specified from the serial data into parallel data and supplies the parallel data to the connected electrical component. The conversion IC that is determined not to match does not supply data to the connected electrical component.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a that supply data to electrical components. As shown in FIG. 7, the conversion IC includes a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 is configured by, for example, a latch circuit, and when serial data is input, the input data is latched bit by bit at the rising edge of the clock signal pulse and output to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit as described above, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in a serial manner) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a format of serial data output from the serial output circuit 132. FIG. 8A shows a data format of serial data output as a control command including control information and address information for driving an electrical component to be controlled. FIG. 8B shows a format of serial data output as a reset command for resetting the driving of the electrical components and stopping all of them.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the control command is composed of 28 bits and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data output destination conversion IC.

  The data (8 bits) is for driving and controlling the electrical component to be controlled. For example, the data (8 bits) includes a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED to be lit, and is logical as a bit corresponding to the LED to be unlit. Contains the value 0. Further, a logical value 1 is included as a bit corresponding to the rotational direction of the motor to be driven, and a logical value 0 is included as a bit corresponding to any rotational direction of the non-driven motor. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the reset command is composed of 19 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the state in which the electric component is being driven and stopping all of them, for example, data including all the logical value 1. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the control command shown in FIG. 8A or the reset command shown in FIG. 8B is input, and is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal to the shift register 652. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (h) corresponding to the header data. If it matches the header data (1FF (h)), it is determined that the position matching the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of control command or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects data of the 11th to 18th bits from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652 and confirms whether or not it matches the address given in advance to the conversion IC. To do.

  The stage device IC board 170, the panel IC board 171, and the frame IC board 172 are provided with, for example, address storage registers 654 that store addresses of conversion ICs to be mounted, respectively, and a header / address detection unit 653. In this case, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the address detected from the shift register 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the conversion IC has been input, and outputs a latch signal to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output a latch signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not addressed to the conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  FIG. 7 shows the case where the address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the rendering device IC board 170, the panel IC board 171 and the frame IC board 172, but instead of the address storage register 654, FIG. From an external hardware circuit (for example, a circuit mounted on the effect control board 90) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of an 8-bit address)) provided in each conversion IC An address may be input. Then, an address may be input to each conversion IC by controlling the input of each address terminal to high or low from the external hardware circuit side. In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit sets the input to the terminal to high by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or sets the input to the terminal to low by switching to the ground. Control to do.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When a latch signal is input from the header / address detection unit 653, the data of the 20th to 27th bits from the head corresponding to the data portion is fetched from the shift register 652 and latched. To do. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the fetched data to the electrical components connected as parallel data (Q0 to Q7).

  If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and all electric components are reset and stopped.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is High, the signal is turned on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1), An ON signal is output to the LED of each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in the registers provided on the effect device IC board 170, the panel IC board 171, and the frame IC board 172, and is set in advance. It is assumed that an ON signal is output to the electrical component according to the set value and is driven.

  FIG. 9 is a timing diagram showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In FIG. 9, a case where a control command is input as a serial data method will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the conversion IC in 1-bit units in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (control command in this example) is completely input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. For this reason, the serial-parallel conversion IC outputs a pattern based on the previously received serial data as a parallel data system.

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output as a parallel data system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, among the parallel data output from the conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are immediately updated at the rising edge of the pulse of the next clock signal after the completion of the serial data input. Switches to the correct lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the conversion ICs 170e and 172b that output detection signals. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, each of the conversion ICs 170e and 172b is composed of a plurality (eight in this example) of D flip-flops 661 to 668. In this embodiment, detection signals from the sensors 182c to 185c or the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 are input in parallel to the corresponding conversion ICs, and are input to one of the D flip-flops 661 to 668 for each detection signal. . A clock signal is input to each of the D flip-flops 661 to 668, and each D flip-flop 661 to 668 sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the clock. The detection signals input in parallel are converted into serial data and output.

  Each D flip-flop 661 to 668 receives an input capture signal from the input capture signal output unit 133 at a predetermined timing. When the input capture signal is input, the detection signals from the sensors 182c to 185c or the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 are latched in the D flip-flops 661 to 668. The latched detection signal is sequentially shifted at the rising edge of the clock and output as a serial data system.

  Next, the details of the wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  In FIG. 11, among electronic components such as various switches and sensors connected to the game control board 40, a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, which are operated when setting the bet number, and a game are started. A start switch 7 that is operated, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set a bet number; Reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and medals stored in the hopper tank A hopper motor 34 for paying out from the exit 9, a payout sensor 35 for detecting medals to be paid out when a winning occurs, and Are out control board 90 is shown, other switches, shown sensors, and the like are omitted.

  The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32 L, 32 C, 32 R, 33 L, 33 C, 33 R, 34, and 35 excluding the effect control board 90 send signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. It is an electronic component that inputs and outputs. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 output signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. 1 electronic component and a second electronic component to which a signal from the game control board 40 is input as the game progresses.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number are used for the operation or medal of the medal. This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the number of bets is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start switch 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process (reel rotation process or the like) for starting the game based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start switch 7 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs the process of deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop the rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R based on the reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reels. In addition, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R cannot be derived, and winning determinations cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  A payout sensor 35 that detects medals to be paid out when a winning occurs is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medals. The main control unit 41 performs a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the generated winning based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 35 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input to the game control board 40 from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of the rotation of the reel, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34 that drives the hopper tank that pays out medals is a second electronic component that receives a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to the occurrence of a prize. The hopper motor 34 drives the hopper tank based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and pays out medals, but does not actually drive the hopper tank based on the signal input. Even if the main control unit 41 outputs the hopper tank drive signal and then receives the signal from the payout sensor 35, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game as if the medal has been paid out. it can. However, the timing at which a signal is input from the payout sensor 35 to the game control board 40 is an error unless the hopper tank drive signal is output. Therefore, when the game is advanced by the driving tool described above, In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection, a driving signal for the hopper tank is required. That is, the hopper motor 34 is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  These gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 are basically electronic devices that are continuously used in common for a plurality of models. Since it is a component and there are few opportunities to remove it from the main body and replace it unless a failure or the like occurs, it is fixed at a predetermined position of the main body of the slot machine. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection with the game electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35. The gaming electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, 35 and the game control board 40 are connected via a relay board, and these The boards and the board and the game electronic component are connected via a cable. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  More specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected to the game control board 40 via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via the power supply board 100. Thus, the game control board 40 is connected to the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 100, and the effect control board 90 include the game control board 40 and the electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, Wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting 33R, 34, and 35 are provided, and each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, A detection signal output from 35 to the game control board 40 or power or a signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In addition, the game control board 40 is connected by wiring the various electronic components and the game control board 40 via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 as described above. From the above, it becomes easy to organize wiring with a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always provided on the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected via a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected via a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start switch 7 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 100 and the hopper motor 34 are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 100 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected with a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c and 601a to 601o is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 100. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start switch 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601j whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33C. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable connectable to a board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34 and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 35 can be connected to a board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 100. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  Further, cable-side connectors C2 and C3 are provided at both ends of the cable 601p, and one cable-side connector C2 is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector C1 fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector C3 is a connector that can be connected to a board side connector C4 fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, wiring is extended from each electronic component 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 32L, 32C, 32R, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34, and 35 without a connector. However, it may be connected to wiring via a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, C1 and C4 provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 610d provided on the cable side. Wiring is connected via a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector) consisting of 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, C2, and C3, and the wiring connection is released by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector. Can be done. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation part relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 100, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined locations on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. If the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, there is a possibility that the bet number is set even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of a cable provided between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be derived and winning decisions may be performed without rotating the reels. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 35 and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a risk that the medals will be counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool or the like, the timing at which the reel driving signal is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side. There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by a driving tool or the like after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34 and the game control board 40 is released. Then, the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  As described above, the signals that are output from the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 according to the progress of the game and that are originally input to the game control board 40 are provided. When output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, and is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When a signal input to the second electronic component 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 is input to the driving tool, on the driving tool side, an output timing of a signal output from the main control unit 41 after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor When a new signal is input to the game control board 40 based on this, the main control unit 41 plays the game based on the reception of the signal. It is possible to perform the control of the line, there is a possibility that fraud such causes game automatically proceed is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent fraud by connecting the driving tool.

  Next, the structure around the power supply to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40 will be described. The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 100. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 100 is supplied to the VDD input terminal as a drive power supply for the main control unit 41, and branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 12 to + 5V (VBB). A DC voltage supply line is formed. The + 5V (VBB) DC voltage supply line is connected to the memory backup power supply input terminal VBB of the main control unit 41 via a backflow prevention diode 312 and is set to the ground level on the power supply substrate 100 side. A large capacity capacitor (not shown) is provided between them. Accordingly, a DC voltage of +5 V (VBB) can be stored in the capacitor, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor is held in the storage state of the RAM 41c in the main control unit 41. It can be supplied as a backup power source.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the +5 V (VBB) DC voltage supply line is not directly connected to the memory backup power input terminal VBB of the main control unit 41 on the game control board 40, but in FIG. As shown, the cable 600a for wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the operation section relay board 110, the operation section relay board 110, and the cable 601g for wiring connection between the operation section relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 are further inserted. It is turned back by the medal sensor 31 and connected again to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and is connected to the memory backup power input terminal VBB of the main control part 41. That is, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor is from the game control board 40 to the cable 600a-operation part relay board 110-cable 601g-inserted medal sensor 31-cable 601g-operation part relay. After passing through the board 110-cable 600a, it is supplied to the main control unit 41, and the storage state of the RAM 41c in the main control unit 41 is maintained.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a state where power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the connection between the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610a of the cable 600a, and the cable-side connector of the cable 600a 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are released, and the backup is performed. The power supply line is cut off, and the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be held and will be lost. That is, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost.

  Next, the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90. As illustrated, the display control circuit 92 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 141 and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, and executes image processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control unit 91. The CGROM 142 stores image element data and moving image data (effect data) displayed as effects on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, a temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, a display circuit 157, and a moving image decoder 158. Yes.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the sub-control unit 91. The transfer control circuit 152 performs control to transfer the effect data read from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on a command from the sub control unit 91. The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading effect data stored in the CGROM 142.

  The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The temporary storage memory 155 is composed of, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and includes an effect data area for storing effect data read from the CGROM 142. Further, in the temporary storage memory 155, based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, information indicating the rendering mode, information indicating that the reel transparent object is set in the transparent area, and information indicating that the transparent area is semi-transparent Etc. are also memorized.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM that is different from the temporary storage memory 155, and stores image data of an image created by a drawing process by the drawing circuit 154. The frame buffer memory 156 has two frames, and switching between image data writing and reading is performed every frame period. The display circuit 157 uses the image data read from the frame buffer memory 156 (for reading) as gradation data, and outputs the image signal to which the synchronization signal is added to the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51. The moving picture decoder 158 is a circuit that decodes the moving picture data when it is read out from the CGROM 142 as effect data.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 41c of the game control board 40 will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the configuration of the storage area of the RAM 41c. As illustrated, the RAM 41c includes an important work 41c-1, a general work 41c-2, a special work 41c-3, a set value work 41c-4, a non-saved work 41c-5, a stack area 41c-6, and a parity storage area. A plurality of storage areas including 41c-7 and an unused area 41c-8 are provided.

  Among these storage areas, in particular, the set value work 41c-4 is an area for storing a set value for determining a winning probability of an internal winning which will be described later. The parity storage area 41c-7 is an area for storing the RAM parity when the power is turned off. Further, the RAM 41c is supplied with power by a backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and stores stored data.

  The general work 41c-2 is an area that is cleared at the end of each game, and a winning combination and a winning flag setting area for a small role and a replay are provided here. The special work 41c-3 is not cleared in a payout process to be described later for each game, and a flag indicating a gaming state to be described later and setting of a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus winning flag are set. A region is provided here.

  The stack area 41c-6 is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored. As the game progresses, an unused stack area in which no data is stored, that is, an unused stack area is stored. And a stack area in use. The stack area 41c-6 is assigned with an area corresponding to a predetermined start address to a final address among the areas of the RAM 41c. The in-use stack area is an area corresponding to the storage address where data is actually stored from the start address of the stack area 41c-6. The storage address is an address that changes every time data is stored. The unused stack area refers to an area corresponding to the address next to the storage address to the last address of the stack area 41c-6. The unused stack area of the stack area 41c-6 is an area that is cleared for each game (for example, at the start of the game) as described later.

  The unused area 41c-8 is an area that is not defined to be used without reading and writing data updated as the game progresses. This area is cleared at the time of start.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 4, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are arranged on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into special bonuses with transition to one of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus, and medals. There are a small combination with paying out and a re-playing combination in which the next game can be started without setting the bet amount. The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) may be simply referred to as a big bonus. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. Big bonuses and regular bonuses are sometimes simply referred to as bonuses.

  FIG. 15 is a view for explaining the types of winning combinations in the slot machine 1, the combination of symbols in the variable display device 2, the bonus ending conditions, and the types of RTs to be transferred from the next game. As the types of RTs in the present embodiment, RT1 to RT5 having different probabilities of winning the re-game player are provided. The gaming state controlled by RT1 to RT5 may be simply referred to as RT.

  The big bonus (1) is won when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the initial gaming state or RT. The big bonus (2) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the initial gaming state or RT. When the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), respectively.

  In the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) ends. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c, respectively. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set to the ON state, when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started, Repeat regular bonus flag is set to ON.

  The big bonus (1) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 270 or more. On the other hand, the big bonus (2) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 270 or more.

  Further, after the end of the big bonus (1), the gaming state is controlled to RT1 until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, regardless of the gaming state when winning. The end condition of RT1 after the end of the big bonus (1) is to win a special role of big bonus or regular bonus, to shift to RT4 or RT5, or to be played 5000 times after being controlled by RT1. It is established by. In many cases, before the game is played 5000 times, a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, or a transition is made to another RT. For this reason, once controlled to RT1, it is controlled to RT1 until a special bonus of a big bonus or a regular bonus is won or a transition to another RT is made.

  Further, after the end of the big bonus (2), the gaming state is controlled to RT2 until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The end condition of RT2 after the end of the big bonus (2) is to win a special bonus of big bonus or regular bonus, to shift to RT4 or RT5, or to be played 5000 times after being controlled by RT2. It is established by. In many cases, before the game is played 5000 times, a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, or a transition is made to another RT. For this reason, once it is controlled to RT2, it is controlled to RT2 until a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is won or a transition is made to another RT.

  Also, when the big bonus (1) is won, when the big bonus (2) is won, after the big bonus (1) is finished, and after the big bonus (2) is finished, credit adjustment is excluded. Any operation of the player is invalidated and controlled in a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. When the big bonus (1) ends and the big bonus (2) ends when the stop function is enabled, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits. Thus, the control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to the stop state where the progress of the game becomes impossible.

  The regular bonus is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is aligned on either of the winning lines in the initial gaming state or RT. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the regular bonus.

  When the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the number of medals paid out to the player reaches 70 or more. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  After the regular bonus ends, the gaming state is controlled at RT3 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The termination condition of RT3 after the regular bonus ends is established by winning a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, shifting to RT4 or RT5, or playing 5000 games after being controlled by RT3. In many cases, before the game is played 5000 times, a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is won, or a transition is made to another RT. For this reason, once controlled to RT3, it is controlled to RT3 until a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is won or another RT is transferred.

  In addition, when the regular bonus is won and after the regular bonus is over, all operations of the player are invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game is controlled in a freeze state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible for a certain period of time. . In addition, when the regular bonus ends when the stop function is enabled, all operations of the player are disabled except for the payment of credits, and reset to a stop state in which the progress of the game becomes impossible Control is performed until the / setting switch 38 is operated.

  Even if the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus are won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R must be operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles. , Won't win any of these roles. This is because the symbols constituting the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  On the other hand, grapes, replays (1) to (3) other than Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Cherry (to be described later), 2 (1), and 2 (2) are described later. When winning in the lottery, since the symbols constituting these roles are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, in principle, regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. It is possible to win a prize.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any winning line for the right reel 2R in any gaming state, and three medals per winning line in the initial gaming state and RT. To be paid out. When “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the right reel 2R, the derivation is made on two pay lines, so a total of six medals are paid out. Even if a cherry is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, the winning combinations will not be won. This is because the symbols of the reel 2R constituting the cherry are not arranged within 5 frames on the reel 2R.

  Grapes are awarded when a combination of “grape-grape-grape” is aligned on any of the winning lines, and nine medals are paid out in the initial gaming state and during RT.

  Note that 15 medals are paid out for winning cherries and grapes during the big bonus and the regular bonus.

  Two (1) are awarded when the combination of “Grape-Grape-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines, and two medals are paid out in the initial gaming state and RT. Two (2) are awarded when a combination of “Grape-Grape-Red 7” is aligned on any winning line, and two medals are paid out in the initial gaming state and during RT. Even if two (1) or two (2) are won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will win these There is nothing. This is because the symbols (“red 7” and “BAR”) of the reel 2R constituting the two (1) or two (2) are not arranged within five frames on the reel 2R. If one of the two (1) and two (2) is won but not won at the proper timing, a chance may be derived.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “banana-banana-grape” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT. Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “melon-melon-melon” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT. Replay (3) is awarded when the combination of “melon-melon-grape” is aligned on either the winning line in the initial gaming state or RT.

  As described above, the replays (1) to (3) can be awarded in principle regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated.

  When winning a replay, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of wagers again, so three medals corresponding to the number of bets 3 that are not required to be set in the next game are paid out. This is essentially the same as.

  After the replay (2) winning, the gaming state is controlled to RT4 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Replay (2) The RT4 end condition after winning is established by winning a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, or by playing the game 200 times after being controlled by RT4.

  After replay (3) winning, the gaming state is controlled to RT5 until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Replay (3) The RT5 end condition after winning is established by winning a special bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, or by playing the game 200 times after being controlled by RT5. The above-described RT1 to RT5 do not end even if a special bonus of a big bonus or a regular bonus is won in the internal lottery.

  When the game state is controlled by either RT4 or RT5, even if Replay (2) or Replay (3) wins, the transition to RT corresponding to the type of replay won (or The number of games controlled by RT is not updated).

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-described winning combination (derivation of a winning display result) is allowed is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the situation.

  In the ROM 41b described above, a winning combination table used for determining a combination determined to be a winning in the internal lottery is stored in advance. The registered content of the winning combination table indicates a predetermined combination. In each game, a combination that is a lottery target is referred to. The winning combination table in the present embodiment is stored in the ROM 41b, and a predetermined combination is read out as a lottery target.

  Specifically, in the winning combination table, when the gaming state is a state other than the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) +2 (1), the big bonus (1) + 2 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 2 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 2 (2), Cherry, 2 (1), 2 (2), Grapes, Replay (1 ), Replay (2), and replay (3) are sequentially read out as a lottery target. Note that “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery. For example, the notation “Big Bonus (1) +2 (1)” indicates that the Big Bonus (1) and 2 (1) are simultaneously read as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery. The big bonus (1) and the big bonus (1) in the present embodiment can be simultaneously read as two lots (1) and two (2), respectively, as a lottery object combination, and can be won in duplicate. Further, the winning combination table is configured so that cherry and grape are sequentially read out as a lottery target combination when the gaming state is a regular bonus.

  Note that the winning combination table may be configured such that the same winning combination is read as the lottery target combination regardless of the gaming state. In this case, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, even if a special combination such as a big bonus (1) or a re-playing combination such as a replay (1) is read out as a lottery target combination, no lottery is performed. Alternatively, the winning flag may not be set even if a lottery is performed to win.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the target part of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the target part is won. Is done. If the winning combination is determined, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c. The number of determination values is read in accordance with the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role table stored in advance in the ROM 41b. The number of determination values for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired based on the gaming state and the set value. This number of determination values is stored in the RAM 41c in the development model and in a storage area provided in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the mass production model.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is the initial gaming state. For example, when the set value is 1, “60” is a regular bonus when the target of the internal lottery is a big bonus (1), and “60” is a regular bonus when it is a big bonus (2). When “120” is big bonus (1) +2 (1), “20” is big bonus (1) +2 (2), and “10” is big bonus (2) +2 When “1” is “10”, when “Big Bonus (2) +2 (2)” is “20”, when “Cherry” is “700” is when 2 (1) When “270” is 2 (2), “270” is grape, “10200” is replay (1), “7900” is replay (2) When “1” is replay (3), “1” is the judgment value It is obtained as. FIG. 16A also shows the number of determination values of each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the set value is 2 to 4.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, the larger the value set as the set value, the larger the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. Yes. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery. As shown in FIG. 16A, in the game in the initial game state, the probability of winning the replay (2) and the replay (3) is set to be extremely low.

  FIGS. 16B to 16F are diagrams showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT. Note that the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of winning combinations other than replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT is the same as the number of determination values shown in FIG. . That is, the number of determination values for each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is RT is the determination acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) shown in FIG. The number of values is replaced with the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 16B shows the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT1 controlled after the big bonus (1) ends. FIG. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “7900” is the replay (3) when the target of the internal lottery is replay (1), and “1108” is the replay (3). In some cases, “221” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 16C shows the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT2 controlled after the big bonus (2) ends. FIG. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “7900” is the replay (3) when the target of the internal lottery is the replay (1), and “998” is the replay (3). In some cases, “491” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 16D is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT3 controlled after the regular bonus ends. . For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “7900” is the replay (3) when the target of the internal lottery is replay (1), and “4915” is the replay (3). In some cases, “4915” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 16E is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT4 controlled after winning the replay (2). It is. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “38000” is the replay (3) when the target of the internal lottery is replay (1), and “100” is the replay (3). At some point, “100” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  FIG. 16F is a diagram showing the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of replays (1) to (3) when the gaming state is RT5 controlled after winning the replay (3). It is. For example, when the set value is 1 to 4, “7901” is the replay (3) when the target of the internal lottery is replay (1), and “1” is the replay (3). In some cases, “1” is acquired as the number of determination values.

  As shown in FIG. 16A to FIG. 16F, when the probability that any one of the replays (1) to (3) wins is in the initial gaming state (7900 + 1 + 1) /65536≈12.057 (7900 + 1108 + 221) /65536≈14.082% when RT1 and (7900 + 998 + 491) /65536≈14.326% when RT2 and (7900 + 4915 + 4915) / 65536≈27. The number of determination values is set to be 053%, (38000 + 100 + 100) /65536≈58.288% when RT4, and (7901 + 1 + 1) /65536≈12.059% when RT5. Thus, the number of determination values is set so that the probability that any one of the replays (1) to (3) wins is higher in RT1 to RT5 than in the initial gaming state. Therefore, RT1 to RT5 can be said to be game states that are more advantageous for the player than when they are in the initial game state.

  Also, RT4 is in a state where it is extremely easy to win replay (1) as compared to other game states. As described above, the winning of the replay (2) is the trigger to shift the gaming state to RT4 which is easy to win such a replay (1). The probability that the replay (2) is won is compared with that in the initial gaming state shown in FIG. Get higher. That is, it can be said that RT1 to RT3 are gaming states that have a high probability of winning internally in replay (2). For this reason, RT1 to RT3 can be said to be advantageous game states for the player in that the probability of being controlled to RT4 is higher than other game states.

  Moreover, the probability of winning the replay (2) varies depending on which of RT1 to RT3 is controlled. Specifically, in the game during RT1, the probability of winning the replay (2) is 1108 / 65536≈1.69% because the number of determination values of the replay (2) is “1108”. Similarly, in the game during RT2, the probability of winning the replay (2) is 998 / 65536≈1.522% because the number of determination values of the replay (2) is “998”. In the game during RT3, the probability of winning the replay (2) is 4915 / 65536≈7.49% because the number of determination values of the replay (2) is “4915”. Thus, the probability of winning the replay (2) while controlled by the RT varies depending on the type of RT being controlled. In the present embodiment, when attention is paid to the probability of winning Replay (2) among RT1 to RT3, the player is in the order of RT3, RT1, RT2 in that the probability of winning Replay (2) is high. It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state.

  Further, even if the replay (2) is won when the gaming state is controlled to RT5, the gaming state is not transferred to RT4. Therefore, RT5 is an initial gaming state and RT1 to RT3 controlled by RT4 when winning the replay (2) in that the gaming state is not controlled by RT4 even when winning the replay (2). It can be said that the gaming state is more disadvantageous to the player than sometimes.

  Such RT5 is controlled by winning the replay (3). The probability that replay (3) is won increases as controlled by RT1 to RT3, as shown in FIGS. That is, it can be said that RT1 to RT3 are gaming states that have a high probability of winning internally in replay (3). For this reason, RT1 to RT3 can be said to be disadvantageous for the player in that the probability of being controlled to RT5 is higher than other gaming states.

  Further, the probability of winning the replay (3) varies depending on which of RT1 to RT3 is controlled. Specifically, in the game during RT1, the probability of winning the replay (3) is 221 / 65536≈0.337% because the number of determination values of the replay (3) is “221”. Similarly, in the game during RT2, the probability of winning the replay (3) is 491 / 65536≈0.749% because the number of determination values of the replay (3) is “491”. In the game during RT3, the probability of winning the replay (3) is 4915 / 65536≈7.49% because the number of determination values of the replay (3) is “4915”. As described above, the probability of winning the replay (3) varies depending on the type of RT being controlled. In the present embodiment, when attention is paid to the probability of winning Replay (3) among RT1 to RT3, the player is in the order of RT1, RT2, RT3 in that the probability of winning Replay (3) is low. It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state.

  Also, RT1 to RT3 have different ratios between the probability of winning the replay (2) and the probability of winning the replay (3) (for example, the winning probability of the replay (2) / the winning probability of the replay (3)). Is set to In RT1, the winning probability of replay (2) is 1.69%, while the winning probability of replay (3) is 0.337%, and the ratio is 1.69 / 0.337≈5.01. It becomes. In RT2, the winning probability of replay (2) is 1.52%, whereas the winning probability of replay (3) is 0.749%, and the ratio is 1.52 / 0.749≈2. .02. In RT3, the winning probability of Replay (2) is 7.49%, while the winning probability of Replay (3) is 7.49%, and the ratio is 7.49 / 7.49 = 1. It becomes. In the present embodiment, the ratio between the probability of winning Replay (2) and the probability of winning Replay (3) among RT1 to RT3 (for example, winning of Replay (2) / Replay (3) It can be said that the game state is advantageous to the player in the order of RT1, RT2, RT3 in that the probability is high.

  The number of determination values for each lottery target combination acquired in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a regular bonus is, for example, when the set value is 1 to 4 and the target lottery for the internal lottery is cherry When “6200” is a grape, “54100” is acquired as a determination value. In this way, the number of determination values is set so that the probability of winning a small role is higher in the regular bonus than in the initial gaming state. For this reason, the regular bonus can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than in the initial gaming state.

  As described above, when the winning combination table is configured so that the same winning combination is read out as the lottery target regardless of the gaming state, the internal lottery target in the internal lottery when the gaming state is a regular bonus “6200” is acquired as a determination value when the combination is a cherry, “54100” is acquired as a determination value when the combination is a grape, and the determination value is obtained when the target combination of the internal lottery is a special combination or replay combination other than these small combinations You may comprise so that a number may not be acquired.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a table index stored in the ROM 41b. As shown in the figure, the table index stores the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored for each internal winning situation.

  Even if the internal winning situation is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the top address of the area where the data for table creation is stored. In such a case, The stop control table is created with reference to the same table creation data. Here, the table creation data is made up of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referred according to the reel stop status is whether all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, only the left reel 2L is stopped, only the middle reel 2C is stopped, or the right reel Depending on whether only 2R is stopped, left and middle reels 2L and 2C are stopped, left and right reels 2L and 2R are stopped, and middle and right reels 2C and 2R are stopped. In addition, in a situation where any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel.

  In the table creation data, the address of the drawing frame number data to be referred to is registered for each reel being rotated for each situation. The address of the number of frames to be drawn that should be referred to according to each situation can be specified based on the top address of the table creation data. From this specified address, the number of frames to be drawn that are necessary for each situation can be obtained. It can be specified. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of frames to be drawn when the same number of frames to be drawn is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  In addition, the number of drawn frames data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. As the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, stepping motors that make one round with a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 2) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  The stop control table is created by referring to the table index and the table creation data as described above. In the stop control table, corresponding to the area numbers 0 to 20, the timing corresponding to each area number is the timing (reel) at which the area corresponding to each area number is positioned at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area). The number of frames to be drawn when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing at which the number of steps from the reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning situation in the game is acquired. Then, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired head address, and the address of the drawing frame number data of each reel corresponding to the state where all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating is acquired from the specified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is developed to create a stop control table for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  Also, when any one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped or when any two are stopped, a table is created according to the top address acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the internal winning situation in the game. The table creation data is identified based on the start address of the data, and the address of the number of frames to be drawn in the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. Then, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described.

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol Will stop in the area).

  In addition, the table index stores only one address as the top address of the table creation data storage area corresponding to one internal winning situation in one gaming state. Is stored with only one address as the address of the storage area of the number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning status, and the number of frames to be drawn corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The created stop control table is also unique for one internal winning situation and reel stop situation (and stop position of a stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the internal winning status and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Will be performed.

  In addition, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the table index, the number of drawn-in frames is drawn so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and no winning combination is arranged, corresponding to the case where any combination is won. Stores the address of the predetermined table creation data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel is controlled to be stopped.

  In addition, the table index stores the address of table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so as not to have any combination corresponding to the case of loss. For this reason, in the case of a loss, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn that do not have any combination is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop them. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled so as to be removed and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In the table index, when a special combination and a small combination are won at the same time, or when a special combination is won with the special combination carried over from the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus ( 1) + Grapes, etc.), the number of draws is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning special role is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. For the non-stop operation position, the address of the table creation data in which the number of drawn frames is determined so that the selected winning combination is drawn to the maximum within the range of four frames is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to stop them together. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the symbol of the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  Also, the table index includes 4 replaying roles corresponding to a case where a replaying role is won in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game (such as big bonus (1) + replay (1)). The address of the table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within the frame range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the re-gamer is elected in a state where the special game has been carried over from before the previous game, the re-gamer will always win and win regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. It will be. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  In addition, when one of the replays (1) to (3) is won, the symbols constituting the replays won for all the area numbers are displayed as stop control tables for all reels. As a result, a stop control table in which the number of drawing frames to be specified is determined is created, and stop control of all reels is performed. When the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won, the number of drawn frames for which “melon” is specified as the display result for all the area numbers as the stop control table of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is A defined stop control table is created. For this reason, when the left reel and the middle reel are stopped when the replay (2) or the replay (3) is won, “melon-melon” is derived on the winning line, and the replay (replay ( It becomes a double tempering state that can win 2) or replay (3).

  Next, the chance eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is when any bonus (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus) is won, or 2 (1), 2 (2) This is a display mode that can be derived when winning, and in this embodiment, as the display result of the left reel, “Grapes / White 7 / White 7” of the 8th to 10th symbols is stopped, and all the roles are the winning line As a result of the display mode not aligned at the top and the display result of the right reel, “Grape, BAR, White 7” of No. 1 to 3 or “Star, Melon, Red 7” of No. 16 to 18 stops and both roles A display mode that is not aligned on the winning line is applied as an opportunity.

  In this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won, or when two (1), two (2) are won, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. Regardless of the order, the chances are controlled so that chances can be derived. However, the chances are that the reels are stopped in the order that satisfies certain conditions (for example, left, middle, and right). The eyes may be derived.

  Here, the reel stop control when deriving the chance is described. For example, when none of the winning combinations are won (losing), as the stop control table of the left reel 2L, the chance of “grape / white 7 / white 7” of the 8th to 10th symbols for all the area numbers A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which display results other than the display results constituting the eyes are specified is created, and stop control of the left reel 2L is performed. Also, as the stop control table for the right reel 2R, the chances of “Grape / BAR / White 7” of the 1st to 3rd symbols or “Star / Mellon / Red 7” of the 16th to 18th symbols for all the area numbers. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which display results other than the display results constituting the number are specified is created, and stop control of the right reel 2R is performed. For this reason, when neither of the winning combinations is won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived when the stop operation of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R is detected at any timing. There is nothing to do.

  When one of the bonus, 2 (1), and 2 (2) is won, the stop control table of the left reel 2L is the 8-10 symbol for the area numbers 4-8. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the display result constituting the chance of “grape / white 7 / white 7” is specified is created, and stop control of the left reel 2L is performed. Therefore, when one of the bonus, 2 (1), and 2 (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols of the area numbers 4 to 8 on the left reel 2L are positioned in the lower stage. Is detected, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived.

  It should be noted that the display results of the middle reel 2C and the right reel have already been derived and the left reel 2L is to be stopped last, and the 8th to 10th symbols “Grape / White 7 / White 7” are displayed on the left reel 2L. When a combination that is not won on the winning line in the combination of the display result and the display result derived to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R wins, 8-10 for the area numbers 4-8. A stop control table is created in which the number of draw-in frames is specified, in which display results other than the “Grape / White 7 / White 7” of the design symbol and the winning results that are not won will not be won are specified, Stop control of the left reel 2L is performed.

  When the big bonus (2), 2 cards (1) (that is, the special role and the role of the right reel 2R which is a symbol other than “red 7” among the two roles) are won, the right reel 2R As the stop control table, the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn by which the display result constituting the chance star of “star, melon, red 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the region numbers 12 to 16 is determined. And the stop control of the right reel 2R is performed. For this reason, in the case where two (1) are won, a display that constitutes a chance eye is detected when a stop operation is detected at the timing when the symbols of the area numbers 12 to 16 of the right reel 2R are positioned in the lower stage. The result is derived.

  It should be noted that the display results of the left reel 2L and the middle reel have already been derived and the right reel 2R is to be stopped last, and the 16th to 18th symbols “Star, Melon, Red 7” are displayed on the right reel 2R. When a combination that is not won on the winning line in the combination of the result and the display result derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C wins, the 16th to 18th in relation to the area numbers 12 to 16 A stop control table is created with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display results other than the symbol “Star, Melon, Red 7” that will not win a winning combination that has not been won. 2R stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (1), regular bonus, 2 cards (2) (that is, the role of the right reel 2R among the 2 roles, the symbol of the right reel 2R is “red 7”) is won, the right reel 2R As the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the display results constituting the chances of “Grape, BAR, White 7” of the 1st to 3rd symbols are specified for the area numbers 19-20 and 0-1 A stop control table is created and stop control of the right reel 2R is performed. For this reason, when two (2) are elected, the chance is obtained when the stop operation is detected at the timing when the symbols of the area numbers 19 to 20 and 0 to 1 of the right reel 2R are positioned in the lower stage. Is displayed.

  It should be noted that the display results of the left reel 2L and the middle reel have already been derived and the right reel 2R is to be stopped last, and the display of “vine, BAR, white 7” of symbols 1 to 3 is displayed on the right reel 2R. When a combination that is not won on the winning line in the combination of the result and the display result derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C wins, the area numbers 19 to 20 and 0 to 1 Creates a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn that specifies the display results other than “Grape, BAR, White 7” of the 1st to 3rd symbols, and the display results that won't win the winning combination. Then, stop control of the right reel 2R is performed.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won, when two (1) are won, or when two (2) are won, the winning combination is won. Thus, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table from which chances can be derived.

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It will be a thing. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side. Is transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90.

  Commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 include at least a BET command, a winning status notification command, a reel rotation command, a reel stop command, a winning information command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, A stop command, an error command, a setting start command, an initialization command, a power-on command, a BET release command, and a credit return command are included. The commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 include other commands, but since they are not directly related to the present invention, a detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The winning status notification command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning information command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all reels are stopped and a winning determination is made.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) and the number of remaining games of RT. And sent at the end of the game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends. The power-on command is a command indicating that power is turned on. The BET release command is a command indicating that the BET has been released, and is transmitted when the settlement switch 10 is operated and the value of the BET counter becomes 0. The credit return command is a command indicating that the credit has been returned, and is transmitted when the settlement switch 10 is operated and the value of the credit counter becomes zero.

The commands are transmitted to the performance control board 90 from Yu Technical control board 40, the data constituting the contents of control, header data or the mark bits, configured end bit is added. Commands to be transmitted to the performance control board 90 from Yu Technical control board 40 is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 41A, it is transmitted to the performance control board 90 via an effect relay board 80.

  As described later, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs various effects based on the commands sent from the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 in this way.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone, so the ROM 91b does not have the reel 2L. Tables indicating all symbols arranged in 2C, 2R are stored in advance, and symbols stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are registered in the stopped symbol table with reference to this table.

  In order to perform an effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 includes a continuous counter indicating the number of remaining games of a continuous effect, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning information command, and Based on the winning status notification command, the winning status of each combination, the combination of display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the game progressing on the game control board 40 side The RAM 91c is also provided with an area for storing the game state applied in (for the winning status and the game state twice).

  As an effect executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, a chance chance was established in the normal gaming state and during RT, no winnings occurred during RT4, or the remaining number of games in RT4 is 3 games There is a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games triggered by this. After the end of the continuous effect, there is a jackpot effect or a lost effect that is executed based on whether the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won.

  In addition, there are bonus effects that are executed when the gaming state is a big bonus or a regular bonus. Further, there are a bonus winning effect that is executed when a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a regular bonus is won, and a bonus end effect that is executed when the big bonus ends. In addition, there is a chance zone effect that is executed when the gaming state is one of RT1 to RT3, and an effect during RT that is executed when the game state is RT4. Execution modes of these effects vary depending on the effect mode.

  Here, of the bonus winning effects, the bonus winning effect that is executed when the regular bonus is won is started when the regular bonus is won (that is, when all reels are stopped), and the number of bets for the next game. It is terminated when set. Further, the bonus winning effect executed when winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won (that is, when all reels are stopped). Is started within the range until the production waiting time (the setting of the bet number is prohibited during this period) elapses. In addition, the bonus end effect is ended within a range from the end of the big bonus until the effect wait time (setting of the number of bets is prohibited during this period). In any case, since the bet number is set for the next game or is finished before that, the game is finished before the game is started. The jackpot or lose effect is started when the number of bets is set for a game after performing the continuous effects for three games, but ends when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started. Be made.

  On the other hand, continuous production, bonus production, chance zone production, or RT production is continuously executed across multiple game periods, so all reels stop during the actual execution period. Next, it is continuously executed including the period until the next game where the start switch 7 is operated is started.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the operation of the player's selection switch 56 and determination switch 57. . In the history display effect, not only the game history is simply displayed as information, but the CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L, 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the game), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  The continuous performance is continuously performed over a period of three games. However, if a bonus is won before the end of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is forcibly terminated at that time. In particular, the game state is controlled to RT4 during a period of continuous production starting from the game that did not receive any winnings during RT4 or the game in which the number of remaining RT4 games is three. Since replay (1) is won with a fairly high probability (replay (1) wins without being missed), there is little chance of winning a bonus during the continuous performance.

  The continuous production is performed according to the production pattern selected according to whether or not the production mode and the bonus are won at the start of the game where the continuous production starts.

  In the production between the individual games in the continuous production, information that can definitely determine whether or not the bonus is won is not notified, but if the three games are combined, it may be known whether or not the bonus is won. In the jackpot effect or the loss effect after the three games of the continuous effect are finished, information that clearly indicates whether or not the bonus is won is notified.

  The bonus winning effect is executed when the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is won, and the bonus medium effect described above when the wager number is set for the next game in which the winning has occurred. Is started.

  The chance zone effect is started after the end of the big bonus or the regular bonus, that is, when a bet amount is set for a game in which one of RT1 to RT3 starts, and replay (2) or replay (3) is won. The process is terminated when the process proceeds to RT4 or RT5, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus is won, or the predetermined number of games is reached.

  The effect during RT is started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game won by Replay (2), that is, the game started by RT4, and the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) Alternatively, the game ends when the regular bonus is won or the specified number of games is reached.

  Among these effects, for the light effects by LEDs, motors, etc., the CPU 91a outputs a command signal for specifying the control target electrical component and drive mode to the drive circuit 93, so that the drive circuit 93 becomes the command signal. The control command in the serial format is output to the conversion IC to be controlled and executed. Among these effects, regarding the display effects by the liquid crystal display 51, the CPU 91a outputs an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. Controlled by the VDP 141 and executed. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM 142 as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each effect mode, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the effect mode at that time. It will be a thing. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  Continuous production (losing) 1 to m, continuous production (bonus) 1 to n, jackpot production, loss production, big bonus production, regular bonus production, big bonus prize production, regular bonus prize production, big bonus end production Data is prepared for each effect mode of mode 1 and mode 2 and stored in CGROM 142. Further, demonstration effect production data and history display production effect data are prepared and stored in the CGROM 142.

  Here, the production data of continuous production (losing) 1 to m is continuous prepared for each pattern selected in a state where none of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2) and the regular bonus is won. It is production data of production. The production data of the continuous production (big hit) 1 to n is the continuous production prepared for each pattern selected in the state of winning either the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus. Production data.

  The production data of continuous production (losing) 1 to m and the production data of continuous production (big hit) 1 to n are productions that are continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games, and therefore have a relatively large amount of data. It has become. The effect data of the effect during the big bonus and the effect during the regular bonus is also an effect in which the effect during the bonus is continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games, and therefore the data amount is relatively large.

  Hereinafter, processing in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed. In order to be able to advance the game, the setting value of the normal range is stored in the setting value work 41c-4 with the main control unit 41 including the CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40. This activation process is a process performed when a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49 of the game control board 40 and the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the main control unit 41 is activated and the main control unit 41 is activated. This process is performed when restarting due to a problem.

  In the startup process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (step S101), and access to the RAM 41c is permitted (step S102). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON (step S103). If the setting key switch 37 is not ON, the RAM parity is calculated based on all the data stored in the RAM 41c except the parity storage area 41c-7 (step S104).

  Next, the RAM parity calculated here is compared with the RAM parity stored in the parity storage area 41c-7, that is, the RAM parity calculated and stored at the previous power-off (step S105), and both the RAM parities are compared. Whether or not the data stored in the RAM is normal (step S106). In the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the RAM 41c is normal based on the RAM parity is performed only in the startup process.

  If the RAM parities do not match in step S106, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and the process proceeds to the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. If the RAM parities match, the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal, and the register stored in the stack area 41c-6 is restored (step S107). Next, it is determined whether or not any special role is won in the state before the power interruption (step S107a). A power-on command indicating a winning combination is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S107b), and the process proceeds to step S108. On the other hand, if no special role is won in the state before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is not won is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S107c). The process proceeds to S108. In step S108, the prohibition of interruption is canceled, and the process returns to the process before power-off.

  If the setting key switch 37 is ON in step S103, the prohibition of interruption is canceled (step S110), and the process proceeds to the setting change process shown in FIG. 19 (step S111). Then, after the setting change process is completed, the game can be progressed and the process proceeds to the game control process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process executed by the CPU 41a in step S111. In the setting change process, first, a setting change flag indicating that it is in the setting change mode is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (step S201), and the setting value (setting change process) stored in the setting value work 41c-4 is set. Before shifting to (1), the value of the set value work 41c-4 has been rewritten to 1, so it is 1) (step S202).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (steps S203 and S204). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step S203, 1 is added to the setting value read in step S202 (step S205), and whether or not the setting value after addition is 5, that is, the normal range is set. It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded (step S206). If the set value after addition is not 5, the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204. If the set value after addition is 5, the set value is corrected to 1 (step S207), and the process returns to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps S203 and S204.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in step S204, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work 41c-4 and the set value is confirmed (step S208). Thereafter, the process waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the setting key switch 37 has been turned off, the setting change flag set in step S201 is deleted (step S210). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before power interruption is a big bonus (step S211a). If it is not a big bonus, the process proceeds to step S211c. On the other hand, if it is a big bonus, the value of the gaming state flag stored in the special work 41c-3 is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state (step S211b), and the process proceeds to step S211c. In step S211c, the data stored in the RAM 41c (the data in the stack area being used in the stack area 41c-6, the setting value stored in the setting value work 41c-4, and the special work 41c-3 are stored. (Except for the value indicating the gaming state) is initialized (step S211c), and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 18 and proceeds to the game control process. When the setting change process is performed by the processing of steps S211a to S211c, if the gaming state before the setting is a big bonus or a regular bonus, the gaming state is shifted to the initial gaming state, while the setting is changed. When the game state before being performed is the initial game state or RT, the game state is returned to that state.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the RAM abnormality error processing executed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40. In the RAM abnormality error process, the payout display unit 13 is controlled to display the RAM abnormality error code on the payout display unit 13 (step S301), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, the data stored in the RAM 41c is compared by comparing the RAM parity calculated at the time of power-off with the RAM parity calculated at the time of startup. It is determined whether or not it is normal, and the routine proceeds to RAM abnormality error processing. In the RAM abnormality error process, since the RAM abnormality error code is displayed on the payout display 13, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled.

  If the RAM parity does not match, the interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, once the RAM abnormality error process is started, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state until the interrupt prohibition is canceled. Even if the power is cut off, the power interruption processing is not performed. In other words, since no new RAM parity is calculated and stored in the power interruption processing, the RAM is always stored except when the setting key switch 37 is activated even when the main control unit 41 is activated. Since the parities do not match, the main control unit 41 cannot be activated to start (resume) the game.

  Once the RAM abnormal error state is entered, the setting key switch 37 is activated and the setting change process is performed until a new setting value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. The game cannot be progressed. In other words, in the state that has shifted to the RAM abnormal error state, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is started on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38 ( Can be resumed). In an error state other than an abnormal RAM error, there is no problem of inconsistency in RAM parity. Therefore, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is released only by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and the game is resumed. Can do.

  As described above, when the game can be progressed, the game processing is repeated one by one in the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And It should be noted that the command transmission from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 will be described only for those necessary for the explanation of the present invention, and the explanation for the command transmission that is not so will be omitted.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a game control process performed by the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 for each game. This process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. Thus, a BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed (step S401). If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ). Details of the BET process will be described later.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process for determining whether or not to perform is performed (step S402). In the lottery process, a winning status notification command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Details of the lottery process will be described later.

  When the lottery process is completed, a reel rotation process is performed (step S403). In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (the reference position is detected by the reel sensors 333SL, 3SC, 3SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R starts and stops, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively. Details of the reel rotation process will be described later.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-described role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping (step S404). ). If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning information command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. Details of the winning determination process will be described later.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed (step S405). In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out the excess number of medals from the medal payout exit 9. In addition, various processes not related to winning (for example, a process related to the end control of the big bonus and the deletion of the winning flag without carryover) are also performed. In the payout process, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus winning flags stored in the special work 41c-3 are not erased. As a result, the winning flags of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are carried over to the next game. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Details of the payout process will be described later. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  Next, the BET process in step S401 will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step S401. In the BET process, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (step S501). Next, whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not the replay game flag based on the previous game replay winning is set in the RAM 41c (step S502).

  If it is determined that the game is a replay game, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S503), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90. (Step S504). In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (the replay is not selected by lottery during the regular bonus, so 3 in the case of YES in S502) (step S505). The processes in steps S503 and S504 are repeated until the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number. When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number, the process waits in a state waiting for detection of the operation of the start switch 7 (step S506). . When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S507). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c is 50 (step S508). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S509). Then, the process proceeds to step S511. When the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, or when the value of the credit counter is not 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path is set to the hopper tank side so that a medal can be inserted. (Step S510). Then, the process proceeds to step S511.

  If both the value of the credit counter and the value of the BET counter are 0, or if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal (step S514). . If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S515). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S516), a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is generated, and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S516). S517). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 (step S518). If the value of the credit counter is 50, the process returns to step S507 as it is. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the value of the credit counter is incremented by 1 (step S519).

  If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S520). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 has been detected (step S521). If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process returns to step S507. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path as the payout side. Further, the operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 are invalidated (step S522). Then, the BET process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S523). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the credit counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected by the single BET switch 5 (step S524). If the operation of the single BET switch 5 has not been detected, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected by the MAXBET switch 6 (step S525). If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S526), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S527), and the current BET counter value is set. A BET command shown is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S528). Then, the process returns to step S507.

  If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S529). If the credit counter value is not 0, the credit counter value is decremented by 1 (step S530), the BET counter value is incremented by 1 (step S531), and a BET command indicating the current BET counter value is issued. It produces | generates and transmits to the production | presentation control board 90 (step S532). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter has reached a specified number (that is, 1 or 3) (step S533). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the process returns to step S507. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to step S529. If it is determined in step S529 that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process returns to step S507.

  Next, the payment process in step S513 will be described in detail. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the checkout process executed by the CPU 41a in step S513. In the settlement process, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited with the medal flow path set as the payout side (step S601). Further, the hopper motor 34 is driven in an ON state (step S602).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the BET number is to be settled (step S603). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. When it is not 0, it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, and when it is 0, it is determined that the BET number is not to be settled.

  When it is determined that the BET number is to be settled, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (step S609), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (step S610). When it is determined in step S610 that the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S609, and when it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0, a BET cancellation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the BET number is not settled, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (step S604). When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated without paying out medals. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (step S606), and it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter has become 0 (step S607). When it is determined in step S607 that the value of the credit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S606, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S611. When it is determined that the value of the credit counter is 0, a credit return command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  In step S611, the hopper motor 34 is turned off to stop driving. Then, the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  Next, the lottery process in step S402 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step S402. In the lottery process, the number of bets (the number of bets) set in the current game is read (step S701). Next, it is determined whether or not the read bet number is a prescribed number (for example, 1 or 3) (step S702). When the read number of bets is not the prescribed number, a RAM abnormality error occurs and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 20 is performed. When the read number of bets is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, the setting value stored in the setting value work 41c-4 of the RAM 41c is read. Here, it is determined whether or not the read setting value is in the range of 1 to 4 that is a value that should be originally taken (step S704). If the read set value is not in the range of 1 to 4, a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the RAM abnormality error process shown in FIG. 20 is performed.

  If the read set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the lottery target combination corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially read out of the lottery target combinations registered in the winning combination table described above (step S705). Next, the setting state of the common flag registered in the role-specific table for the read lottery target is referred (step S706), and it is determined whether or not the common flag is in an ON state (step S707).

  If the common flag is ON, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state is acquired for the read lottery target character (step S708). Then, the process proceeds to step S710. If the common flag is not in the ON state, the setting value set in the RAM 41c is read, and the determination value stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the gaming state and the setting value for the lottery target role The number is acquired (step S709). Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the random number for internal lottery stored in the determination area of the RAM 41c (the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42, the random number extracted from the random number generating circuit 42 is converted into software by using the number of determination values acquired in step S708 or S709. (Including random numbers processed in a predetermined procedure, random numbers added in step S710, etc.), and the result of the addition is used as a new random number for internal lottery. Then, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (step S711).

  If no overflow has occurred, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations to be selected (step S712). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to step S705, and the process continues with the next lottery target registered in the winning combination table as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the process proceeds to step S721.

  If an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, the winning flag of the lottery object combination read in step S705 is set to ON.

  In step S721, a winning status notification command is generated according to the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the reel rotation process in step S403 will be described in detail. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step S403. In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (for example, about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (step S801), and if the wait time has not elapsed, Wait until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, a new wait time is set and the timing is newly started (step S802a). The wait time is measured by subtracting and updating values stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at predetermined intervals.

  Next, a work initialization code at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is set in the register, and the rotation of the reel is started (step S803). Here, a reel rotation command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have started to rotate is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S804). Then, with reference to the table index, the table creation data is identified, and based on the identified table creation data, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the internal winning situation, and the other reels stop situation is created. Then, it is created for each reel being rotated (step S805), and a work initialization code at the time of completion of stop preparation is set in the register (step S806a). Thereby, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any valid operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R has been detected (step S807). If no stop switch operation is detected, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or longer) has occurred (step S808). ). If no reel rotation error has occurred, the process returns to step S807.

  If it is determined in step S808 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating the reel rotation error is set in the register (step S809), and the process proceeds to a predetermined error process (step S810b). Along with this, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is also temporarily stopped. If the error is released, the process returns to step S803 again, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is resumed.

  If operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected in step S807, the reel motor (any one of 32L, 32C, 32R) corresponding to the operated stop switch from the reel reference position at that time. The number of steps (stop operation position) is acquired, the number of frames to be drawn is specified with reference to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, and the stop position is set to the work corresponding to the stop reel (step S811). Here, a reel stop command indicating the type of reel to be stopped and the symbols to be stopped for the reel is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90 (step S812). After that, it waits until the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, or 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops (step S813).

  Then, when the rotation of the reel (2L, 2C, 2R) corresponding to the operated stop switch stops, it is determined whether or not all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (step S814). If the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not stopped, the process returns to step S805. If the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the winning determination process in step S404 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step S404. In the winning determination process, the winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read in order from the beginning (step S901). Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the read combination is aligned with any of the five winning lines L1 to L5 (step S902).

  If the symbol combination of the combination is complete, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (step S903), and the process proceeds to step S904. If the symbol combination of the combination is not complete, the process proceeds to step S904 as it is. In step S904, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been determined as a winning determination among the combinations corresponding to the gaming state. If there is a winning combination that has not yet been determined for winning, the process returns to step S901, and the next winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is read out.

  If all of the winning combinations corresponding to the gaming state are targeted for winning determination, then whether or not a replay winning is made depending on whether or not any one of the replay (1) to replay (3) winning flags is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not (step S905).

  If no replay winning is made, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) is won according to whether or not the big bonus (1) winning flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S906). If the big bonus (1) has been won, the big bonus (1) flag is set to ON in the RAM 41c, and the big bonus (1) winning flag is set to OFF. If the RT counter value is set in the RAM 41c, the RT counter is initialized and the RT is terminated, and the bonus counter (B counter) value indicating the remaining payout number is set to 270 (step S907). In step S907, a bonus winning effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the big bonus (1) winning is further set. Then, the process proceeds to step S913. Also, during the period when the big bonus (1) flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus is controlled.

  If the big bonus (1) has not been won, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (2) has been won according to whether or not the big bonus (2) winning flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S908). If the big bonus (2) is won, the big bonus (2) medium flag is set to the ON state and the big bonus (2) winning flag is set to the OFF state in the RAM 41c. If the RT counter value is set in the RAM 41c, the RT counter is initialized and the RT is terminated, and the bonus counter value indicating the remaining payout number is set to 270 (step S909). In step S909, a bonus winning effect waiting time for controlling to the frozen state after the big bonus (2) winning is further set. Then, the process proceeds to step S913. Further, during the period when the big bonus (2) medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus is controlled.

  If the big bonus (2) has not been won, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on whether or not the regular bonus winning flag is set in the RAM 41c (step S910). If the regular bonus is won, the regular bonus flag is set to ON in the RAM 41c, and the regular bonus winning flag is set to OFF. If the RT counter value is set in the RAM 41c, the RT counter is initialized and the RT is terminated, and the bonus counter value indicating the remaining payout number is set to 70 (step S911). In step S911, a bonus winning effect waiting time is set for controlling the frozen state after the regular bonus winning. Then, the process proceeds to step S913. If the regular bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S913.

  If one of the replays (1) to replay (3) is won in step S905, the replay game is set by setting the replay game in-progress flag to the ON state in the RAM 41c in step S912. This replay game in-progress flag is deleted when the bet amount is automatically set in the next game. Then, the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, the type of winning combination based on the winning flag set in the ON state in the RAM 41c (the winning flag is not set in the case of deviation) and the number of medals to be paid out with the winning are displayed. A winning information command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 90. Then, the winning determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Next, the payout process in step S405 described above will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the payout process executed by the CPU 41a in step S405. In the payout process, first, a winning flag set to ON in the RAM 41c is read (step S1001), and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the winning flag read in step S1001 is a winning flag for one of the small roles of grape, cherry, two (1), and two (2). Thus, it is determined whether or not there has been a small role winning accompanied by a medal payout (step S1002). If the small role is not won, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  If the small role is won, by controlling the hopper 80, the number of medals is paid out or credits are added (step S1003), and the number of payouts is counted (step S1004). The number of payouts counted in step S1004 is stored in the RAM 41c. Then, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  Here, it is determined in step S1002 that a small role has not been won, or it is determined in step S1004 that one game has been completed by counting the number of payouts. In other words, if the small role is won, it is determined that the game is over when the payout of the medals is completed and the number of payouts is counted, but if the small role is not won, the medals are not paid out. This is the same as determining that the game is over when all reels have stopped rotating.

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a big bonus (in this case, excluding the game that won the big bonus) depending on whether or not the bonus-in-progress flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the current gaming state is not in the big bonus, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011, whether or not all values of RT1 counter to RT5 counter indicating that RT1 to RT5 are controlled and the number of remaining RT games being controlled is 0, that is, RT1 to RT5 It is determined whether neither is controlled. If it is determined that any one of the RT1 counter to RT5 counter is not 0, that is, it is controlled by any of RT1 to RT5, the value of the corresponding RT counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1005. If it is determined that all values of the RT1 counter to RT5 counter are 0, that is, it is not during RT, the process proceeds to step S1005 as it is.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in RT4 or RT5, that is, whether or not it is a gaming state that can be controlled by RT4 or RT5 by winning Replay (2) or Replay (3). If it is determined in step S1005 that the current gaming state is either RT4 or RT5, that is, it is not a gaming state that can be controlled by RT4 or RT5, the process proceeds to step S1011. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1005 that the current gaming state is neither RT4 nor RT5, that is, a gaming state that can be controlled by RT4 or RT5, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the replay (2) has been won. If it is determined that the replay (2) is won, in step S1007, the RT counter value is initialized, 200 is set as the RT4 counter value, and the process proceeds to step S1023. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the replay (2) has been won, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the replay (3) has been won. When it is determined that the replay (3) is not won, the process proceeds to step S1023. When it is determined that the replay (3) has been won, in step S1008a, the RT counter value described above is initialized, then the RT5 counter value is set to 200, and the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described in steps S1005 to S1008a, if controlled by RT4 or RT5, even if replay (2) or replay (3) wins, YES is determined in step S1005. As a result of the determination, control is performed so that the processing of steps S1006 to S1008a is not performed, that is, it is not newly transferred to RT4 or RT5. Therefore, when controlled to RT4, even if Replay (3) wins, RT4 set with a high probability of winning Replay (1) can be continued. For this reason, RT4 can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, when controlled to RT5, even if Replay (2) wins, RT5 in which the probability of winning Replay (1) without being shifted to RT4 is set to be extremely low compared to RT4. Will continue. Therefore, RT5 can be said to be a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, even when controlled by RT4 or RT5, there is a possibility that replay (2) and replay (3) may be won ((e) and (f in FIG. 16). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when controlled by RT4 or RT5, replay (2) and replay (3) may not be won or may not be selected.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1009 that the current gaming state is a big bonus, a value obtained by subtracting the number of payouts counted in step S1004 from the value of the bonus counter in the RAM 41c is updated as the value of the bonus counter, The value of the payout counter is cleared and initialized (step S1010). The process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1010, the number of games and prizes in the bonus are counted using the counter of the RAM 41c.

  In step S1013, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus counter is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of medals has been paid out corresponding to the bonus. When it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1023. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus counter is 0, it is determined whether or not it is during the big bonus (1) (step S1014). When it is determined that the big bonus (1) is in progress, the big bonus (1) middle flag is set to the OFF state, and the counter value for counting the number of games and winnings in the big bonus is cleared and initialized. (Step S1015). In step S1015, an ending effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the end of the big bonus (1) is set. In step S1016, if the values of the RT1 to RT5 counters are set, they are initialized to 0, the value of the RT1 counter is set to 5000, and the process proceeds to step S1023. When it is determined in step S1014 that the big bonus (1) is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1017.

  In step S1017, it is determined whether or not a big bonus (2) is in progress. When it is determined that the big bonus (2) is in progress, the big bonus (2) middle flag is set to the OFF state, and the counter value for counting the number of games and winnings in the big bonus is cleared and initialized. (Step S1018). In step S1018, an ending effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the end of the big bonus (2) is set. In step S1019, when the values of the RT1 to RT5 counters are set, the counter is initialized to 0, the value of the RT2 counter is set to 5000, and the process proceeds to step S1023. When it is determined in step S1017 that the big bonus (2) is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1020.

  In step S1020, the regular bonus medium flag is set to an OFF state, and the counter value for counting the number of games and the number of winnings in the regular bonus is cleared and initialized. In step S1020, an ending effect waiting time for controlling the frozen state after the regular bonus is completed is set. In step S1021, if the values of the RT1 to RT5 counters are set, the counter is initialized to 0, the value of the RT3 counter is set to 5000, and the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In step S1023, based on the big bonus (1) flag, the big bonus (2) flag, the regular bonus flag, and the RT counter in the RAM 41c, a gaming status command indicating a gaming status applied in the next game is issued. It produces | generates and transmits to the production | presentation control board 90 (step S1023). Then, the payout process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 21 to end the process of one game.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 performs the transition of the game state among the initial game state, RT1 to RT5, the big bonus, and the regular bonus, and serially according to the progress of the game. The command converted into data is transmitted to the effect control board 90. On the other hand, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect (light effect, display effect, etc.) based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect control board 90, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 100, the sub-control unit 91 is activated. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91. When the effect control main process is started, first, a predetermined effect initial setting process is executed (Ss1). Details of the effect initial setting process will be described later.

  When the effect initial setting process is completed, an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 such as the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state when the power supply is stopped is executed (Ss2). Details of the effect control restoration process will also be described later.

  After executing the effect control restoration process, after interrupting is prohibited (Ss3), the effect side random value update process is executed (Ss4), and the interruption is permitted (Ss5). . The effect random number value update process executed in Ss4 is a process for updating all or part of the random value used on the effect control board 90 side by software.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect initial setting process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss1 of FIG. In the effect initial setting process, first, interruption is prohibited (Ss101), and an interrupt mode is set (Ss102).

  Next, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of the designated address of the stack pointer, are performed (Ss103). Also, the built-in device register is set (initialized) in the sub-control unit 91 (Ss104). Then, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in peripheral circuits in the sub-control unit 91, are set (initialized) (Ss105). Thereafter, the RAM 91c is set to be accessible (Ss106).

  Thereafter, the VDP 141 is initialized, for example, after transmitting a predetermined initialization signal to the VDP 141 and then transmitting initial setting data for setting in the internal register of the VDP 141 (Ss107). Thereby, in the VDP 141, for example, the storage contents of the temporary storage memory 155 and the frame buffer memory 156 are initialized based on the initialization signal and the initialization data received from the sub-control unit 91, the transfer control circuit 152, the drawing circuit, and the like. 154 or the moving picture decoder 158 or the like is interrupted, or the storage area in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is assigned to set the display area. When the display image update cycle in the liquid crystal display 51 is set, at least one of various setting operations performed is executed.

  Next, for example, setting for generating a random number used on the side of the effect control board 90 is performed such as setting the operation of the random number circuit 134 based on the random number initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss108). Further, for example, an interrupt is set by setting a reset / interrupt controller or a CTC register based on the interrupt initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss109). Thereby, in the sub-control unit 91, a timer interrupt for controlling the rendering operation is generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). Then, the effect initial setting process ends.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect control restoration process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss2 of FIG. First, a data check of the RAM 91c is performed to determine whether the check result is normal (Ss201). In this process, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the calculated checksum and an effect checksum buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 91c are stored. Compare with checksum. The effect checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. This effect checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the effect checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the effect checksum buffer does not match, it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result of the data in the RAM 91c is normal, it is determined whether or not the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is ON (Ss202). The state of the effect backup flag is set in the effect control flag setting unit when the power supply is stopped. And the setting location of this production backup flag is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped.

  When the production backup flag is ON, the production backup flag is cleared to the OFF state (Ss203), and then the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped. Setting is made (Ss204). For example, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 91b is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 91c. Here, when the work area of the RAM 91c is backed up by a backup power source, it is only necessary to set initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area in the backup setting table. Subsequently, the production backup data for restoring the control state is read from the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the settings of the internal register of the CPU 91a and the work area of the RAM 91c are sub-controlled according to the read data. The state before the unit 91 is restarted is restored.

  Thereafter, based on the setting in step Ss204, for example, a display control command corresponding to the restored state is transmitted to the VDP 141, and various settings in the VDP 141 are resumed (Ss205). Note that after executing the process of Ss205, for example, the process may return to the process corresponding to the contrast value set in the program counter by the return of the control state in Ss204.

  If the data check result of the RAM 91c is abnormal in Ss201, or if the effect backup flag is OFF in Ss202, the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss206). Subsequent to the initialization of the RAM 91c, the initial setting for setting the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the initial state is performed (Ss207).

  In the effect control restoration process, when a power-on command is received from the main control unit 41, if the power-on command indicates that the special role is won, a notice effect indicating that the special role is won is executed by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Then, while the control is continued until the special combination is won, if it is a power-on command indicating that the special combination is not won, the effect control restoration process is terminated.

  Also, in the production control recovery process, until the power-on command or initialization command is received, even if the production backup is normal, it does not return to the production state, and even if other commands are received, The production is not controlled. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special announcement and the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won.

  That is, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is transmitted. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating the winning, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating the winning of the special role, and avoids receiving the power-on command on the side of the sub-control unit 91 to notify the winning of the special role. Since it is impossible to avoid the execution of the production, when the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption and the special role is elected before the power interruption as described above, The winning of special role will be notified.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) according to the setting of the interrupt in Ss109, and the timer / allocation of the RAM 91c is performed by the reset / interrupt controller. Is set to the ON state. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect control interrupt process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in response to the timer interrupt flag being set to the ON state.

  In the effect control interrupt process, first, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (Ss301), and the contents of the internal register are saved (Ss302). Next, an effect backup process, which will be described later in detail, is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, data necessary for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up (Ss303). Then, the reset circuit 95 is cleared by setting control data for turning on the initialization signal in a predetermined output port included in the I / O port 91d (Ss304).

  Next, a command analysis process for analyzing various commands of the serial data transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed (Ss305), and an effect control process described in detail later is executed (Ss306). By this effect control process, a process for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 is performed according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. In the effect control process, the effect lamps 180 and 181, the effect drive lamps 182 to 187, the reel LEDs 162 a to 162 i, and the side lamps 160 and 161 are driven in accordance with the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Processing is performed. Further, in the effect control process, a process for generating a game sound from the speakers 53 and 54 is performed according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, a volume adjustment process to be described later is executed (Ss306a). By this volume adjustment process, the volume of the game sound generated from the speakers 53 and 54 is adjusted according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, serial input / output processing described later is executed (Ss306b). By this serial input / output processing, serial data is output to the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a, and the serial data from the conversion ICs 170e and 172b is input. Next, effect random number value update processing is performed, and various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the effect control board 90 side (Ss307). Thereafter, the contents of the register saved in Ss302 are restored (Ss308), and the effect control interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect backup process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss303 of FIG. In the effect backup process, data for effect backup is set using stored data in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss401). Here, for example, depending on the values of various flags provided in the effect flag setting unit of the RAM 91c and the values of various timers provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 91c, the control state in the sub control unit 91 and the display control circuit 92 If the progress of various processes can be specified, the production backup data may be configured by data indicating the values of these flags and timers. Further, if the control state of the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 can be specified from the stored value of the internal register (for example, program counter) of the CPU 91a, for example, the stored value of such internal register The production backup data may be configured with the data indicating. Alternatively, the effect backup data may be configured by combining data indicating the value of the flag or timer and data indicating the stored value of the built-in register. In addition, even if any data that can be recovered after restarting by specifying the control state in the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 is included in the production backup data Good.

  Next, check data is created, for example, by calculating a checksum using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss402). And the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting part of RAM91c is set to ON state (Ss403), and effect backup processing is complete | finished. When a part of the RAM 91c is backed up by the backup power source, the production backup data created in Ss401, the check data created in Ss402, the data indicating the production backup flag set in the ON state in Ss403, etc. Then, it may be stored in the backup area of the RAM 91c at the end of the effect backup process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process and the volume adjustment process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in Ss306 and Ss306a of FIG.

  FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the effect control process. In the effect control process, the CPU 91a performs a demonstration effect execution process for executing a demonstration effect (step Ss501) and performs other processes (step Ss504) when the demonstration period is described later. The demo period is, for example, a period excluding a continuous production and a bonus production being executed, and is a period from when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the game ends until a BET command is newly received. Thereby, for example, in the demonstration period, a predetermined demonstration effect is executed until a new BET command is received.

  When starting the demonstration effect, the CPU 91a outputs a demonstration effect start signal for instructing the demonstration effect start to the display control circuit 92. When the display control circuit 92 receives the demonstration effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the demonstration effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image data drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154 The display circuit 157 starts a predetermined demonstration effect on the liquid crystal display 51.

  On the other hand, in the effect control process, a game effect execution process for executing a game effect (including a continuous effect) according to the game state is performed when it is outside the demonstration period (step Ss502). Further, when a predetermined notification condition is established, a navigation execution process for executing a navigation effect that notifies the winning combination is performed (step Ss503), and other processes are performed (step Ss504). The predetermined notification condition refers to winning a cherry, a grape, and one of the two (1) and (2), for example.

  When starting a game effect, the CPU 91a outputs a game effect start signal for instructing a corresponding game effect start to the display control circuit 92. When receiving the game effect start signal, the display control circuit 92 reads effect data for performing the corresponding game effect from the CGROM 142, stores it in the temporary storage memory 155, and the image drawn in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154. The game effect corresponding to the liquid crystal display 51 is started by the display circuit 157. When the effect data for performing the continuous effect is stored in the temporary storage memory 155, the game is not performed for a predetermined time without betting, for example, until the continuous effect ends. However, the display control circuit 92 prohibits writing to the temporary storage memory 155 and performs other effects such as a demonstration effect so that the effect data for performing the demonstration effect is not stored in the temporary storage memory 155. Absent.

  Further, in other processing, for example, processing for generating game sounds corresponding to the game effects from the speakers 53 and 54 is performed. When performing an effect of generating game sound from the speakers 53 and 54, the CPU 91a outputs a command signal for generating a game sound corresponding to the game effect to the audio output circuit 94.

  In other processes, for example, based on the player's operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 during a period other than during the continuous production and during the execution of the bonus production, and during the period when the game is not being performed, A history display effect execution process for executing a history display effect for displaying a predetermined game history on the liquid crystal display 51 is performed. During the continuous production, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is invalidated so that the history display production is not executed.

  In other processing, for example, serial setting processing for setting serial data for performing a light effect by driving an LED or a motor according to a game effect is performed.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. In the serial setting process, the CPU 91a first determines whether it is time to change the lamp control (lighting mode) according to the game effect (step Ss951). When it is determined that it is time to change the lamp control, the CPU 91a receives a lamp control signal including the address information of the conversion IC to which the LED constituting the lamp to be controlled is connected and the control information after the change, from the ROM 91b. Is extracted from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in (Step Ss952).

  In the lamp control signal storage area, for example, lamp control signals are stored corresponding to the type of game effect and the time elapsed since the game effect was started. In step Ss952, a process of reading a lamp control signal specified from the elapsed timing is performed. Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 8 are added to the extracted ramp control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S953). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  Next, it is determined whether it is time to change the motor control (driving mode) in accordance with the execution of the game effect (step Ss956). When it is determined that it is time to change the motor control, the CPU 91a provides the ROM 91b with a motor control signal including the address information of the conversion IC to which the motor to be controlled is connected and the changed control information. Extraction is performed from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step Ss957).

  In the motor control signal storage area, for example, motor control signals are stored corresponding to the type of game effect and the time elapsed since the game effect was started. In step Ss957, a process of reading a motor control signal specified from the elapsed timing is performed. Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 8 are added to the extracted motor control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step Ss958). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step Ss959).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output are set. In this example, nine data storage areas for storing the lamp control signal or the motor control signal are prepared, and the lamp control signal and the motor control signal are sequentially stored in step Ss953 and step Ss958 in the order of output. The control signal stored in the data storage area is output in the serial input / output process in step Ss306b.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial input / output process. In the serial input / output process, the CPU 91a first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step Ss970). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset (step Ss971), and the lamp control signal and motor control signal stored in the data storage area are serialized by the drive circuit 93. The output is output to the output circuit 132 (step Ss972). In this case, when a plurality of control signals are set in the data storage area, the CPU 91a sequentially reads out the control signals in step Ss972 and outputs them to the serial output circuit 132. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132, and the effect device IC substrate 170, panel IC substrate 171 and frame IC substrate 172 are connected via the relay substrate 90a. Is output as a serial data system.

  Next, the CPU 91a causes the input capture signal output unit 133 to output an input capture signal to the effect device IC board 170 via the relay board 90a (step Ss973). The conversion IC 170e mounted on the stage device IC board 170 latches the detection signals of the sensors 182c to 185c based on the input input signal being input, and produces the serial data system via the relay board 90a. The data is output to the control board 90. The CPU 91a reads input data from the serial input circuit 131 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 91c (step Ss974). In step Ss974, the CPU 91a controls the input data to be read from the serial input circuit 131 after being delayed by the time for receiving the input data from the conversion IC 170e.

  Next, the CPU 91a causes the input capture signal output unit 133 to output an input capture signal to the frame IC substrate 172 via the relay substrate 90a (step Ss975). The conversion IC 172b mounted on the frame IC board 172 latches the detection signals of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 based on the input input signal being input, and uses the relay board 90a as a serial data system. This is output to the effect control board 90. The CPU 91a reads input data from the serial input circuit 131 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 91c (step Ss976). In step Ss976, the CPU 91a controls to read the input data from the serial input circuit 131 after delaying the input data from the conversion IC 172b.

  Each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a determines whether the address information specified from the control signal output in the serial input / output process is the address of the conversion IC. Then, the conversion IC determined to match converts the control information specified from the control signal into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected electrical component. The conversion IC that is determined not to match does not supply data to the connected electrical component.

  Here, an example of an LED lighting mode and a motor driving mode will be described. FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 are diagrams for explaining an example of the lighting mode for the LEDs 182a to 187a constituting the effect driving lamps 182-187 and the driving mode for the motors 182c to 185c.

  Fig.38 (a) is a figure which shows the lighting aspect when the lamp | ramp control signal for lighting LED182a-187a is output. When turning on the LEDs 182a to 187a, the address information of the conversion IC 170c to which the LEDs 182a to 187a are connected (for example, “00000011” because the address is 03) and the control information to turn on all the LEDs 182a to 187a (for example, , The least significant bit (hereinafter referred to as the 0th bit, and the bits higher than the 0th bit are referred to as the 1st to 7th bits in order) is the logical value of the LED 182a, the first bit is the logical value of the LED 183a,... Is a logical value of the LED 187a, a lamp control signal including “00111111”) is output. Thereby, the conversion IC 170c determines that the addresses match, converts the control information into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected LEDs 182a to 187a. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38A, all the LEDs 182a to 187a can be turned on.

  When changing the lighting mode of FIG. 38A (at the timing of changing the lamp control), the address setting information of the conversion IC 170c to which the LEDs 182a to 187a are connected in the serial setting process of FIG. A lamp control signal including control information corresponding to the lighting state after the change (the logical value of the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to 1 and the logical value of the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to 0) is set. And output in the serial input / output process of FIG.

  FIG. 38B is a diagram illustrating a driving mode when a motor control signal for driving the motors 182c to 185c is output in the lighting mode of FIG. 38A. Here, as described above, the reflector 182d to 184d is driven upward by rotating the motor 182b forward, and the reflector 182d to 184d is driven downward by rotating the motor 182b to rotate the motor 183b forward. Thus, the reflectors 182d to 184d are assembled to be driven leftward and reversely rotated so that the reflectors 182d to 184d are driven rightward. The motor 184b is rotated in the same manner as the motor 182b and is reflected by the reflector 185d. 187d upward and reverse rotation to drive the reflective umbrellas 185d to 187d downward, and the motor 185b rotates forward in the same manner as the motor 183b, the reflective umbrellas 185d to 187d to the left, and reverse rotation to make the reflective umbrellas 185d to 187d to the right The case where each is assembled so that it can be driven is explained. .

  When driving the reflectors 182d to 187d downward, the address information (for example, “00000100” because the address is 04), the motor 182b and the motor 184b are connected to the motor 182b and the motor 184b. Control information (for example, the 0th bit is the logical value of the forward rotation of the motor 182b, the 1st bit is the logical value of the reverse rotation of the motor 182b, the 2nd bit is the logical value of the forward rotation of the motor 183b, ... If the bit is a logical value of reverse rotation of the motor 185b, a motor control signal including “00100010”) is set by the serial setting process of FIG. 35 and output by the serial input / output process of FIG. Thereby, the conversion IC 170d determines that the addresses match, converts the control information into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected motors 182b to 185b. As a result, as shown in FIG. 38B, the reflectors 182d to 187d can be driven downward.

  FIG. 38C is a diagram illustrating a driving mode when a motor control signal that drives the motors 182c to 185c to output outward is output in the driving mode of FIG. 38B. When the reflecting umbrellas 182d to 187d are driven outward, the address information of the conversion IC 170d to which the motor 182b and the motor 184b are connected (for example, “00000100” because the address is 04), the motor 182b, and the motor Control information for forward rotation of 184b and forward rotation of motor 183b and reverse rotation of motor 185b (for example, the 0th bit is the logical value of the forward rotation of the motor 182b, the first bit is the logical value of the reverse rotation of the motor 182b, When the second bit is the logical value of the forward rotation of the motor 183b... And the seventh bit is the logical value of the reverse rotation of the motor 185b, a motor control signal including “10010101”) is set in the serial setting process of FIG. It is output by 36 serial input / output processes. Thereby, the conversion IC 170d determines that the addresses match, converts the control information into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected motors 182b to 185b. As a result, the reflectors 182d to 184d can be driven to the left while being driven upward, and the reflectors 185d to 187d can be driven to the right while being driven upward.

  Then, when the sensor 182c detects that the reflectors 182d to 184d are in the center position in the vertical direction, and the detection signal is input, the logic value of the motor 182b is 0, that is, a motor control signal for stopping the rotation. Set and output. Similarly, when the sensor 184c detects that the reflectors 185d to 187d are at the center position in the vertical direction and the detection signal is input, the motor control signal for stopping the logical value of the motor 184b is 0, that is, the rotation is stopped. Is set and output. As a result, the reflecting umbrellas 182d to 184d can be driven to the left, and the reflecting umbrellas 185d to 187d can be driven to the right to stop in the outward state. In this outward state, the direction of irradiation of light from the LEDs 182a to 184a is different from the direction of the player who plays in the slot machine (for example, a player who is playing in the slot machine provided on the left side) The direction in which the light is emitted from the LEDs 185a to 187a is different from the direction of the player who plays in the slot machine (for example, a player who is playing in the slot machine provided on the right side) Direction).

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a driving mode when a motor control signal for driving the motors 182c to 185c to rotate the reflectors 182d to 187d counterclockwise is output. When the reflecting umbrellas 182d to 187d are driven to rotate counterclockwise, the reflecting umbrellas 182d to 187d are driven upward by rotating the motor 182b and the motor 184b forward (uppermost), and then the motor 182b and the motor 184b are driven. And reversely rotate the motor 183b and the motor 185b to drive the reflectors 182d to 187d in the left direction (leftmost), and further maintain the rotation directions of the motor 182b and the motor 184b as they are. 185b is rotated in the reverse direction to drive the reflectors 182d to 187d downward (lowermost), and the rotation directions of the motor 183b and the motor 185b are maintained as they are, and the motor 182b and the motor 184b are rotated forward to make the reflectors 182d to 182d to 187d to the right Further, the motor control is performed such that the rotating directions of the motor 182b and the motor 184b are maintained as they are, and the motor 183b and the motor 185b are rotated forward to drive the reflectors 182d to 187d upward (uppermost). The signal is set in a timely manner in the serial setting process of FIG. 35 and is output in a timely manner in the serial input / output process of FIG. Thereby, the conversion IC 170d determines that the addresses match, converts the control information into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected motors 182b to 185b. As a result, the reflectors 182d to 187d can be driven to rotate counterclockwise.

  38 and 39, the lighting mode for the LEDs 182a to 187a constituting the lighting drive lamps 182 to 187 and the driving mode for the motors 182c to 185c have been described. However, the lighting lamp for other electrical components is used. Similarly, the LEDs 180a to 180e and 181a to 181e constituting the LEDs 180 and 181; the reel LEDs 162a to 163i; and the LEDs 160a to 160c and 161a to 161c constituting the side lamps 160 and 161 similarly have control signals corresponding to lighting modes. It is controlled by setting timely in the serial setting process 35 and outputting timely in the serial input / output process of FIG.

  Next, a game effect executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 according to the game state, and a light effect by the LED and the motor performed in response to the game effect will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the game effect and the light effect executed according to the game state. In FIG. 40, the contents of effects by the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 will be described as the light effects.

  When the gaming state is in bonus, a bonus medium effect is executed as a game effect. In addition, when the bonus is in effect, an effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and stopping outward is executed as a light effect (see FIG. 38C). As a result, it is possible to appeal to other players that the bonus is being performed, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority.

  It is to be noted that an effect of turning on and rotating the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 is executed at the time of winning and at the time of paying out medals when the bonus is being performed. Thus, even when the bonus medium effect is being performed, it is possible to easily inform the player that the winning has been won.

  When the gaming state is during RT after RT (end of RT1 to RT3) after the bonus ends, a chance zone effect is executed as a game effect. In addition, during RT1 to RT3, as the light effect, the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are turned on and the effect of stopping inwardly (the direction in which the irradiation direction is directed toward the player playing the game in the slot machine) is executed. (Reflective umbrellas 182d to 184d are directed to the right, and reflective umbrellas 185d to 187d are directed to the left). As a result, it is possible to increase the tension of whether to be controlled to RT4 advantageous to the player or to RT5 disadvantageous to the player when the chance zone is being produced, and to improve the interest of the game Can do.

  It is during the chance zone effect, and during the period from winning the replay (2) or replay (3) until winning, the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are turned on and rotated. The Thereby, it is possible to ask whether it is controlled to RT4 that is advantageous to the player or RT5 that is disadvantageous to the player. Thereafter, when the replay (2) is won and the RT4 is controlled, the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 are turned on and stopped in an outward direction. As a result, it is possible to appeal that other players are controlled by RT4, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority. On the other hand, when the replay (3) is won and the RT5 is controlled, an effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and stopping it downward is executed.

  When the gaming state is in RT4, an RT4 effect is executed as a game effect. Further, during RT4, as the light effect, the effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and stopping outward is executed. As a result, it is possible to appeal to other players that they are in RT4, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority.

  In addition, when RT4 is in progress and the prize is won, an effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and rotating the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 is executed. Thereby, even when the effect during RT4 is being performed, it is possible to notify the player that the prize has been won in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, when the game state is specified such as when a predetermined chance appears, or when no prize is generated during RT4, a continuous effect is executed as a game effect. In addition, when the continuous production is in progress, the production of turning on the production drive lamps 182 to 187 and stopping the production inward is performed as the light production. This makes it possible to increase a sense of tension as to whether or not the big bonus has been won during continuous production, and improve the interest of the game.

  It is to be noted that when the game is over and the game is over, the production drive lamps 182 to 187 are turned on and the number of the finished games (for example, the first game or the second game) Etc.), an effect of rotating the number of times corresponding to the number of times is executed. Thereby, it is possible to ask whether or not the bonus is won. After that, when the third game is over and the bonus is won, an effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and stopping outward is executed. As a result, it is possible to appeal to other players that the bonus has been won, and the superiority of the players can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the third game is over and the bonus is not won, an effect of turning on the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 and stopping it downward is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 34, FIG. 34 (b) is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing. In the volume adjustment process, the CPU 91a performs mute to minimize (mute) the volume of the currently playing game sound when a predetermined mute condition is satisfied when the game sound is played at a normal volume (here, maximum). Processing (step Ss601) is performed. The predetermined mute condition is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed since the game state command was received (from the end of the previous game), a credit return command has been received (credit settlement), and a BET command has been received ( A predetermined time has passed since the BET operation was performed, a BET cancellation command was received (BET cancellation), and a predetermined time has passed without receiving a reel stop command (from the start of the game) after receiving the winning status notification command This means that a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a new reel stop command after receiving a reel stop command (after a stop operation).

  On the other hand, when the game sound is muted, a canceling process (step Ss602) is performed in which the muting is canceled when a predetermined canceling condition is satisfied and the game sound is output at a normal volume. The predetermined release condition refers to, for example, receiving a BET command, receiving a winning status notification command, receiving a reel stop command, and the like. When the mute condition is satisfied, the control signal of the reset command described in FIG. 8B is set in the serial setting process of FIG. 35 and output in the serial input / output process of FIG. Also good. Thereby, when the silencing condition is satisfied, the silencing process can be performed and the light effect can be ended. When the silencing condition is satisfied, the lighting mode and the driving mode may be temporarily stored in the RAM 91c or the like. And when the cancellation | release conditions are satisfied, you may comprise so that the control signal for performing a light effect in the lighting mode and drive mode which were temporarily stored may be set and output. Thereby, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, the mute is canceled and the light effect can be resumed.

  Next, the contents of the volume adjustment process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 will be described based on the timing charts shown in FIGS.

  Here, for example, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect during the time when the above-described continuous production is performed and after the previous game is finished until the next game is started is shown in FIG. This will be described based on the timing chart (a). First, when the continuous production is started, the sound output is started with the maximum volume (MAX) of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous production (ta1). Thereafter, the game progress is interrupted when 30 seconds have passed without setting the bet amount (ta3) from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous production is ended and the gaming state command is acquired (ta2). As a result, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced).

  After that, when the player performs a betting number setting operation and obtains a BET command (ta4), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum (original Back to the level).

  Next, an example of the case where the credit is settled before 30 seconds have elapsed since the last game was finished when the above-described continuous production is being performed is shown in the timing chart of FIG. Based on First, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tb1). Thereafter, at the predetermined time point before the time point (tb4) when 30 seconds have passed without the setting of the betting number from the time point when the predetermined game in the continuous production is finished and the gaming state command is acquired (tb2). When the credit is settled by the settlement operation by the player (tb3), the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (mute).

  After that, when the player performs a betting number setting operation and obtains a BET command (tb5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is raised to the original level, that is, the maximum (original Back to the level).

  Next, an example in which the bet number is set before 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the previous game, and then a predetermined time has elapsed without setting a new bet number is shown in FIG. A description will be given based on the timing chart of a).

  First, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tc1). After that, the bet amount is set before the time (tc4) when 30 seconds elapse from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous production ends and the gaming state command is acquired (tc4). When the BET command transmitted based on this is acquired (tc3), the current volume is maintained without decreasing the volume of the continuous game sound effect.

  Next, at the time when 30 seconds have passed without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command after the bet number is set and the BET command is acquired at tc3 (tc5), Minimize the volume of continuous game sound effects.

  After that, when the bet number setting operation is performed by the player and a new BET command is acquired (tc6), the progress of the game is resumed, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  Next, an example in which the bet amount is set before 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the previous game, and the bet amount is settled after that, based on the timing chart of FIG. explain.

  First, when the continuous production is started, the sound output is started with the maximum volume (MAX) of the continuous game effect sound corresponding to the type of the continuous production (td1). Thereafter, the bet amount is set before the time (td5) when 30 seconds elapse (td2) from the time when the predetermined game in the continuous performance is finished and the gaming state command is acquired. When the BET command transmitted based on this is acquired (td3), the current volume is maintained without decreasing the volume of the continuous game sound effect.

  Next, from the time when the bet number is set at td3 and the BET command is acquired, the time before 30 seconds elapses (td6) without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command, When the player has settled the bet amount (BET cancellation) (td4), the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced).

  After that, when the bet number setting operation is performed by the player and a new BET command is acquired (td7), it is assumed that the progress of the game is resumed, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 91a starts timing after the previous game is finished, and if the BET command is acquired before 30 seconds have elapsed since the timing has been started, the CPU 91a At the time of acquisition, a new timing is started, and the volume of the continuous game sound effect is reduced even when 30 seconds have elapsed without acquiring a new BET command or winning status notification command from that point. However, when a BET command is acquired before 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of time measurement, it is not necessary to newly start time measurement.

  Here, an example of the volume adjustment process as a modification of the present embodiment will be described based on the timing chart of FIG. 43. When the continuous effect is started, the volume of the continuous game sound effect according to the type of the continuous effect Is set to the maximum (MAX) and the sound output is started (te1). Thereafter, the bet number is set before the time (te4) when 30 seconds elapse (te2) from the time when the predetermined game in the big bonus is completed and the gaming state command is acquired. When the BET command transmitted based on the received command is acquired (te3), the current volume is maintained without lowering the volume of the continuous game sound effect, and is kept as it is without starting a new timing from that point. To do.

  Next, at the time (te4) when 30 seconds have elapsed without acquiring the winning status notification command from the time (te2) when the game ends in te2, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced). To do.

  After that, when the game is started by the player and the winning status notification command is acquired (te5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is raised to the original level, that is, the maximum ( Return to the original level).

  Next, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect after the game is started when the continuous performance is performed will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  For example, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tf1). After that, when a predetermined game is started during continuous production and a winning situation notification command is acquired (tf2), when a reel stop operation is performed and 60 seconds have elapsed without acquiring the reel stop command (tf3) ) At that time, it is assumed that a predetermined time of 60 seconds has passed without acquiring a reel stop command by the player since the game started, that is, the progress of the game is interrupted, Minimize the sound effect volume.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation on the first reel and obtains a reel stop command (tf4), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is increased to the original level, that is, the maximum. (Return to the original level).

  Next, an example of the volume adjustment processing of the continuous game sound effect after the stop operation of the first or second reel will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  For example, when the continuous effect is started, the sound output is started with the volume of the continuous game sound effect corresponding to the type of the continuous effect being maximized (MAX) (tg1). Thereafter, after a predetermined game is started during continuous production and a winning status notification command is acquired (tg2), a stop operation of the first or second reel is performed and a reel stop command is acquired (tg3). When the second or third reel is stopped, that is, when 60 seconds have elapsed without acquiring a new reel stop command (tg4), the stop operation of the first or second reel is performed at that time. Assuming that the predetermined time of 60 seconds has passed without acquiring a new reel stop command, that is, the progress of the game is interrupted, the volume of the continuous game sound effect currently being played is minimized (silenced).

  After that, when the player performs a stop operation on the second or third reel and obtains a reel stop command (tg5), assuming that the progress of the game is resumed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is set to the original level, that is, Increase to maximum (return to original level). Next, the work required when changing models will be described. In the slot machine described in the present embodiment, when the model is changed, generally, at least the effect device attached to the upper part of the front door is replaced with another effect device. And in the conventional slot machine, when the production device is replaced with another production device, the electrical components installed differ depending on the model, so the number of signal lines and the number of connectors are insufficient. Inconvenience that the work does not proceed easily occurred.

  However, in the present embodiment, the control signal for controlling the electrical components constituting the rendering device 179 is configured to be output as serial data from the rendering control board 90, and the conversion IC mounted on the rendering device 179. Is configured to be supplied to various electrical components. For this reason, the number of wirings of the connector can be reduced. Further, even if the electrical component constituting the effect device to be replaced is different from the electrical component constituting the effect device 179, the other effect device is a circuit corresponding to the effect device IC board 170 (in this embodiment). If the circuit is equipped with a conversion IC to which a unique address is assigned, the other effect device is connected to the relay board 90a using the same effect device cable as the effect device 179. It is possible to control the electrical components constituting the rendering device. For this reason, even if it is a case where it replaces with the production | presentation apparatus from which an electrical component differs, the number of signal lines does not correspond, the number of connectors does not correspond, and replacement work can be performed easily.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a state where the rendering device 179 is removed from the front door. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a state in which another rendering device 179A having a mounted electrical component different from the rendering device 179 is attached to the front door. FIG. 47 is a view illustrating a front view of the slot machine in a state where another effect device 179A is attached to the front door.

  When replacing the effect device 179 with another effect device, as shown in FIG. 45, while removing the effect device 179 from the front door, the connector on the effect device cable 173 side is removed from the connector of the relay board 90a, The connector of the cable connected to the liquid crystal display 51 is disconnected from the connector of the display control circuit 92. As shown in FIG. 46, the cable side connector of the effect device 179A is inserted into the connector of the relay board 90a, the liquid crystal connector is inserted into the connector of the display control circuit 92, and the effect device 179A is attached to the front door. . Thereby, as shown in FIG. 47, the effect device 179 can be replaced with another effect device 179A.

  Next, in order to make it difficult for the driving tool to be connected, a description will be given of the restriction on the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500, the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g and the cable-side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Next, the detailed structures of the board case 200 and the connector restricting member 500 that house the game control board 40 will be described.

  48 and 49 are exploded perspective views showing the substrate case 200 and the attachment base 250 for attaching the substrate case 200 to the casing constituting the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting member 500. FIG. FIG. 51 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cap 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500, and FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 51, FIGS. 52B and 52C are cross-sectional views taken along the line BB in FIG. 51, and FIG. 54A is a perspective view showing a state in which the connector cap is attached to the member 510, FIG. 54A is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 53, and FIG. 54B is a sectional view taken along the line D- in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case main body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620c are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. In addition, engagement grooves 212 are formed at both ends of the long side from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201 to engage engagement pieces 511 of the attachment side member 510 described later.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the lower surface is open, the center of the upper surface is bulged, and stepped portions 203a and 203b are formed on both short sides. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  The step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203 are formed with recesses 203e and 203f, respectively. In particular, the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the step portion 203b is accommodated in the substrate case 200. An insertion hole 234 through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the gaming control board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to a housing forming the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the bottom plate 250 a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201 a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of a synthetic resin, and drooping pieces 255b and 255b extending downward (rearward in the figure) from both ends of the fixing piece 255a having four fixing holes 256 formed on the upper surface, and the drooping piece 255b. The engaging portions 257 and 257 are formed in a substantially U-shape formed in the left and right direction (up and down direction in the drawing) from both ends of the 255b. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the connector regulating member 500 is attached to the board case 200 and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a and attached to the board side connector 510. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, and the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached to the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a. Removal is regulated.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. Standing piece that stands up from both ends of the base piece 510a that is in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f and that has a notch 512 that allows the cable-side connector 610a to escape and a cylindrical locking hole portion 513 that has a locking hole 513a inside. Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact the upper surfaces of both end portions of the stepped portion 203b in the upper case 203 are extended through 510b and 510b, and are further engaged through side pieces 510d and 510d that hang down from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. The stoppers 257 and 257 have a shape extending inward, and the base piece 5 of the attachment-side member 510 is attached to the board case 200. 0a, upper piece 510c, the opposing surface is adapted to abut respectively on the bottom of the top surface and the recess 203f of the stepped portion 203b of the upper case 203 relative to the board case 200 of 510c.

  On the inner surface of the locking hole 513a in the locking hole 513, as shown in FIG. 51, a locking groove 514 is provided upward from the lower end of the locking hole 513a at a position opposed to the center. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a, and the shallow groove portion 514a of the opposing locking grooves 514 and 514. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, when attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the substrate case 200, the cable connected to the substrate side connector 620a. A covering portion 521 having a substantially U-shaped cross-sectional view covering a part of the side connector 610a is formed, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering portion 521 is formed with a locking hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position opposed to the center, and engagement portions 523 and 523 that are elastically deformable inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 have engaging holes 523a and 523a when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member 510 with the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a. The locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the 513a are provided at positions that engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restricting member 500 to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the longitudinal movement of the upper case 203 with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted, and as a result, the upper case 203 is engaged with the locking portion 210 of the lower case 201. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510 d and 510 d outward and attached to the stepped portion 203 b of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the top surface of the step 203b and the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the upper case 203, respectively, and the notch 512 provided in the base piece 510a The board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is connected to the inside of the board case 200 through the notch 512 and the insertion hole 234 so as to coincide with the insertion hole 234 provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203. To be exposed to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is attached to the mounting base 250 by fitting into the engaging grooves 254a and 254a of the mounting base 250, respectively.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking holes 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the sealing piece fixing member 255, the movement of the substrate case 200 in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 at the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side is restricted and the locking is performed. Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted by the pillar 253, the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251 a and 251 a of the mounting base 250. It becomes impossible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from.

  Further, when the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be removed, as shown in FIG. 54A, the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the cable 600a is connected to the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion hole 234 of the board case 200 and the notch 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment-side member 510. After connecting the cable side connector 610a, with the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a connected, as shown in FIG. 53, the covering portion 521 of the connector cover 520 covers the upper side of the cable side connector 610a. Then, the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513 a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned to cover the cable-side connector 610a with the covering portion 521, the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a among the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the inner surface of the locking hole 513a. The locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a and 523a at the tips of the engaging portions 523 and 523 reach the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514, As shown in FIG. 52A, the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 is brought into contact with the side surfaces of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, so that the engagement of the locking cylinder 522 is achieved. By rotating relative to the hole 513 is restricted, and ligated with the mounting member 510 and the connector cover 520, a state of integrated connector regulating member 500 is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  When the connector cover 520 is detachably attached to the attachment side member 510, a part of the upper surface of the cable side connector 610a is covered by the covering portion 521 as shown in FIGS. The movement of 610a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted.

  As described above, with the mounting side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a. By attaching a part of 620a to the attachment side member 510 so as to cover from above, the cable side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board side connector 620a.

  Next, a situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, the attachment side member 510 or the cable cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment side member 510, or the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is removed. Alternatively, it is necessary to break the fixing member 255, remove the board case 200 from the mounting base 250, and remove the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached thereto from the board case 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a due to a failure of the cable 600a or the like, the latter method is used when the board case 200 is removed by the former method and replaced by the board failure or the like. Just remove it.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a, a method for removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, a connector such as a nipper is used. The connecting piece 522a that connects the covering portion 521 of the cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the engaging grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a, 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the locking claws 523a, 523a and The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 52C, when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a due to is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a is released Door will be able to.

  When the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment-side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. Therefore, the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a There will be traces of unlocking.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a when replacing the whole board case 200, a method of removing the attachment side member 510 from the board case 200 together with the connector cover 520 will be described. The sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. Accordingly, the horizontal movement toward the sealing piece 232 is also possible, so that the locking pieces 235 and 235 of the board case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a is removed by the connector cover 520. Since the restriction on the movement in the direction is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, a trace of releasing the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a remains.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection with the connector 620a is disabled, the new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250, and the new board case 200 with the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled is mounted on the mounting base. Attached to 250, the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed. In Rukoto, becomes again impossible removably mounting member 510, when releasing the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the substrate-side connector 620a is in a state leave its mark. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging portions 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 in a state where the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. When the attachment member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250 and are held between the pieces, the deformation of the both side pieces 510d and 510d of the mounting side member 510 is restricted outward. Although it is a structure that cannot be removed from the substrate case 200, for example, a part of the attachment side member can be screwed or removed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. The board case 200 is fixed to the casing by fixing the board case 200 to the casing (mounting base) so that the screws and the locking pins are concealed. Thus, the attachment-side member may be restricted from being removed from the substrate case 200, and the attachment-side member is fixed to the housing in a state where the attachment-side member is attached to the substrate case 200. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration cannot be removed from the substrate case 200.

Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.
55 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 57A is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 56, and FIG. 57B is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After accommodating the operation unit relay board 110, the cable side connectors 611a and 612g of the corresponding cables 600a and 601g are connected to the board side connectors 621a and 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and then the cover member 680 is attached to the case. By attaching to the body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a and 612g from the board side connectors 621a and 622g is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 55, board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, and both side faces on the long side of the mounting table 660 and short boards are mounted. The board side connectors 622a, 622b, 622c, and 622d to 622f whose insertion holes open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation part relay board 110 when the operation part relay board 110 is placed on one side surface of the side. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where the 622g is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a and 622b of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622c, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover portion 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 612a and 612b connected to the board side connectors 622a and 622b, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 612c connected to the board side connector 622c. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 612d-f connected to the board-side connectors 622d-f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notch 682c for releasing the cable 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g is formed to be narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g, and both ends of the notch 682c are covered from the cover portion 689. Pieces 683 and 683 are respectively provided.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side of the cover member 680 and on one side surface on the short side, the locking holes are formed so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 55, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and the board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c. , 622d to 622f and 622g are connected to cable side connectors 611a, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d to 612f and 612g, respectively. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684 of the locking cylinder 684. As a result, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684 from the outside, and as shown in FIG. 56, the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are connected to the locking hole. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 57A, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 611a connected to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. Covered by the covering portions 681c and 681c of 680, the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 611a from the board side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 57B, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 612g connected to the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 are covered. 680 covering pieces 683 and 683 are covered, and movement of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted, and removal of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g is restricted. ing.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, a connecting piece 684a for connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the cover member 680 with a tool such as a nipper is provided. Break. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering portions 681c and 681c. The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683 and 683 is also released, so the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a are released. And the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g can be released.

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a and the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g are released. It will be.

Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the LED 182a constituting the effect driving lamps 182 to 187 is constituted by the CPU 91a, the drive circuit 93, and the conversion IC mounted on the effect device IC substrate 170. 187a to 187a emit light in a lighting mode according to the gaming state, and control is performed to drive the motors 182b to 185b of the driving source for rotating the reflectors 182d to 187d in a driving mode according to the gaming state. For this reason, by rotating the reflectors 182d to 187d by the motors 182b to 185b, the light irradiation directions from the LEDs 182a to 187a can be diversified. It can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (1-2) In the above-described embodiment, when the replay (2) occurs, the winning probability of the replay (1) is controlled to RT4. On the other hand, when the replay (3) occurs, the winning probability of the replay (1) is lower than that of the RT4, that is, the player is controlled to RT5 having a lower degree of advantage for the player than the RT4. Thereby, the advantageous degree for a player can be varied depending on whether replay (2) occurs or replay (3) occurs. As a result, the player's expectation for the occurrence of replay (2) and the player's expectation for the occurrence of replay (3) can be differentiated, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  (1-3) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, a game accommodated in the board case 200 by attaching the connector restricting member 500 including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The removal of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a of the control board is restricted, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250 and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other. The removal of the connector restricting member 500 from the case 200 will be restricted, and the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 will not be broken to release the fixation between the substrate case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a. In other words, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace that the sealing piece 232 is broken, and a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument cannot be connected without leaving a trace. It will be possible to reliably discover that it may have been

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, a light effect can be performed on the player side of the slot machine and on the other player side adjacent to the slot machine. Therefore, as described with reference to FIG. 40, according to the gaming state, for example, a light effect for encouraging the player's expectation of the slot machine and superiority to other players adjacent to the slot machine. The light effect for appealing the feeling can be performed, the light effect can be improved efficiently, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, the rendering device 179 is integrally attached to the front door of the slot machine 1. For this reason, even if the production device 179 is replaced with another production device in accordance with the model change, it is not necessary to replace the front door, and the production device can be removed and replaced with another production device. As a result, the cost of changing the model can be reduced, and the replacement work can be facilitated.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, the control signal from the effect control board 90 is converted into serial data by the drive circuit 93 and output to the effect device IC board 170 or the like via the relay board 90a. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of cables connected between the effect control board 90 and the relay board 90a and the number of cables connected between the relay board 90a and the effect device IC board 170.

  Further, even when the effect device 179 is replaced with another effect device equipped with different electrical components, the other effect device corresponds to the effect device IC board 170 on which the conversion IC to which a unique address is assigned is mounted. If the circuit which mounts is mounted, the said another production | presentation apparatus can be connected to the relay board | substrate 90a using the same cable, and a different electrical component can be controlled. For this reason, the replacement work required to remove the effect device 179 and replace it with another effect device can be further facilitated.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, after the big bonus or the regular bonus ends, it is possible to control to RT1 to RT3 in which the probability of winning the replay (2) and the replay (3) is improved from the initial gaming state. it can. For this reason, the player's expectation for being controlled by a big bonus or a regular bonus can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) The termination conditions of RT1 to RT5 in the above-described embodiment are not satisfied even if the bonus is won unless the bonus is won. As a result, if the bonus is not won, even if the bonus is won, the RT can be controlled continuously until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, avoiding giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the bonus was won when there were remaining games, especially when controlled by RT4. can do.

  Also, especially during RT4, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control with replay is prioritized over control with bonus. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the player has won. In addition, since the bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until the bonus is won, after the RT4 reaches the prescribed number of games, it is possible to win the bonus won during that time. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus at the end of RT4.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, when replacing the game control board 40 together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken and the board case 200 and the housing ( If the fixing with the mounting base 250) is released, the connector regulating member 500 can be detached from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. The cable side connector 610a can be separated from the board side connector 620a without breaking and opening the board case 200.

  Further, the connector restricting member 500 is composed of an attachment side member 510 and a connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 520 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Since part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, the assembly work is reduced in restricting the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  In addition, the connector cover 510 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the connector 610a be securely removed from the board-side connector 620a, but also the material required for manufacturing the connector cover 510 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding position on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  In addition, inwardly engaging portions 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the engaging portions 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the mounting member 510 is attached to the board case 200 by being assembled to the board case 200 and engaged with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the board case 200. Since the member 500 can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 to the base case 510 a and the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c with respect to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500 and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500 are both made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even when an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500 and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. Connection between the side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g. The restriction member 500 and the connector restriction member 650 are used for restriction. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out fraudulent activities such as inputting / outputting various signals, so that illegal business operations can be effectively prevented.

  Further, in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, the connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520, and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 are broken. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. , The above fraud can be more effectively suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool, and the game control board 40 is connected. Since it is difficult to perform an illegal act such as causing the main control unit 41 to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game, it is possible to effectively prevent the unauthorized operation.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses and the game Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 according to progress, a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connections between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the release of the connectors, but the start lever 7 and the game control board The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connectors 40 and restricting the release of the connection between the connectors. In addition, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel is operated after the reel starts rotating, only the connector connection between the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R and the game control board 40 is restricted. The same effect can be obtained even if a member is provided to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110 are connected to the main control part 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game. Are connected by a single cable 600a. Therefore, by restricting the connector connection between the board-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 620a of the game control board 40, that is, only one connector connection is released. The release of the connection between the signal lines can be restricted, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Even when a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected via a plurality of cables, the board-side connector is connected. A plurality of parts are prepared for restricting the release of these connector connections by restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board-side connectors and the plurality of cable-side connectors with a single part, as well as being arranged in close proximity. There is no need, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g connecting the 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restricting member 650, these There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of a plurality of connector connections, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  (8) In the present embodiment, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected from the game control board 40 to the cable 600a-operation unit relay board 110-cable 601g-inserted medal sensor 31-cable 601g-operation unit relay board 110. -After being routed through the cable 600a, it is supplied to the main control unit 41, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, and the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable of the cable 600a Connection between the side connector 610a, connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g. Disconnect any of In, it is cut the supply line of the backup power supply, can not hold data RAM41c of the main control unit 41, so that the lost. That is, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection, the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is elected using the driving tool is provided to the player at the time of starting the business of the game shop. Unauthorized sales such as doing can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, so that the connector connection between them is performed. The data in the RAM 41c is lost when the game is released, but the electronic components (for example, the start lever 7 and the reels after the reel starts rotating after the signal input / output necessary for the progress of the game) are performed. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is performed via stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are not configured to stop the reel until the stop operation is performed.

  (9) In addition, a capacitor or a battery for storing a backup power supply, an electronic component mounting board for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game, and a relay board for these electronic parts (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) The backup power supply line from the capacitors and batteries mounted on the mounting board and the relay board is connected to the game control board through the cable together with the signal lines of the electronic components, and is connected to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, the data in the RAM 41c will be lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released. In addition to obtaining the same effect, the game control board 40 is connected to a mounting board or a relay board from a capacitor or battery via a cable. Since the backup power is supplied, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main controller 41 when the cable is disconnected. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  (10) In the present embodiment, the backup power is supplied to the main control unit 41 via the electronic component so that the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection is released. For example, if a signal output circuit that always outputs a specific signal even in the event of a power failure is installed, a specific signal is always detected even in the event of a power failure, and the detection of a specific signal is interrupted Is mounted on the game control board 40, and the output path of this specific signal is controlled from the game control board 40 via electronic components that are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. Returning to the board 40, the signal monitoring circuit is configured to be input, and when the main control unit 41 is activated, the signal monitoring circuit stores that the detection of a specific signal is interrupted. If the fact that the detection of a specific signal is interrupted is stored, initialization may be executed and the data stored in the RAM 41c may be cleared. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent illegal sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool to the player at the start of the business of the game shop.

  (11) In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is won before the power interruption, the CPU 41a wins the special role. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and the notification effect indicates a prize indicating that the special role is won. The information is continuously executed until the information command is received, that is, until the winning special combination is won.

  (12) Further, the sub-control unit 91 is in the effect state even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized. Even if another command is received, the production control is not performed accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect unauthorized devices such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power will cause a failure). Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing the gaming machine with the slot machine 1 set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool at the start of the business of the game shop.

  In addition, since the announcement effect is continuously executed until the winning information command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, the winning of the special role, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  (13) In the slot machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, a continuous game sound effect is continuously output when the bonus medium effect and the continuous effect are being executed. When the predetermined time period of 30 seconds has passed without the bet number being set after the end of the game, that is, the state where no operation related to the progress of the game is performed after the previous game is completed is the predetermined time period 30. The settlement process (return control) is performed according to the credit settlement operation performed by the settlement switch 10 as well as the case where the settlement switch 10 performs the settlement process (release control). Even if it is performed, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is lowered. That is, in a state where a continuous game sound effect is being produced, the volume of the continuous game sound effect is set according to the player's intention even before the predetermined time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Since it can be lowered, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players even if the game is interrupted.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated effectively for 60 seconds after the game starts, that is, when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start to rotate. Alternatively, the rotation of any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and after the display result is derived on the variable display unit corresponding to the stopped reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the display result is not yet derived. If there is a display unit, the volume of the game sound is increased when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R has not been operated effectively for 60 seconds since the last stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R was operated effectively. By lowering, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In a state where a continuous game sound effect is being produced, after the promotion notification is started in one game and the volume of the continuous game effect sound is once reduced, the game resumes in the game and the promotion notification ends. The reel corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the variable display is displayed after the reel stop operation corresponding to any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed again after the volume of the continuous game sound effect is restored. It may be configured such that the volume of the game sound is lowered even when a state in which the stop operation is not performed continues for a volume reduction waiting time shorter than a predetermined volume reduction waiting time of 60 seconds (for example, 30 seconds).

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not executed during the execution of the continuous effect. In other words, the reading of the demonstration effect production data and the history display production effect data from the CGROM 142 and the writing to the production data area are prohibited. The data is not overwritten and deleted from the effect data area. Since it is not erased, there is no need to read the effect data of the continuous effect from the CGROM 142 and write it in the execution effect data area.

  For this reason, in order to execute a demonstration effect or a history display effect that is not directly related to the current game progress, the effect data of the continuous effect with a large amount of data is read from the CGROM 142, and the execution effect of the temporary storage memory 155 is executed. The overhead of processing to write in the data area is not duplicated. Since the operations of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 are also invalidated during the execution of the continuous production, the production mode is not switched, and the production data corresponding to the same situation is obtained only by the production mode being different. It is also possible to prevent the overhead of having to read from and write to the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155.

  Further, since the process for performing the continuous effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side, the control burden for performing the process on the game control board 40 side can be shared with the effect control board 90 side, and the control on the game control board 40 side The burden can be reduced.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the RAM is controlled to be in an abnormal error state, the game is disabled, and the setting change mode is entered. If the setting value is not newly selected or set based on the setting change operation, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine 1, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting Since the change operation is performed by an employee of the game store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, when determining whether or not to win the lottery role in the internal lottery, the set value stored in the set value work 41c-4 is an appropriate value (1 If it is not a value in the range of ~ 4), instead of determining whether or not to win with a probability based on a default setting value (for example, setting 1), in this case too, it is controlled to a RAM abnormal error state, If the progress of the game is disabled and the mode is changed to the setting change mode and a setting value is not newly selected and set based on the setting change operation, the disabled state of the game is not released. Similarly, when the betting number is not an appropriate value, the RAM abnormal error state is controlled. In other words, even if it is not possible to properly determine whether or not to win the winning lot in the internal lottery, the game will be played again based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation. Is secured, so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  (18) In addition, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the main control unit 41 running out of control. Since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. This can only be done in situations where there is a high probability that an abnormality has occurred. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not necessary to make this determination, and the load on the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the RAM parity is calculated based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, particularly in the power interruption interrupt process executed by the input of the voltage drop signal generated when the power is turned off. The RAM parity is set in the parity storage area 41c-7, and at the next startup, the RAM parity obtained by the calculation is compared with the RAM parity stored in the parity storage area 41c-7, and the data in the RAM 41c is compared. Whether or not is normal. In this way, since it is possible to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only by comparing the RAM parity at the time of input of the voltage drop signal generated when the power is shut off and at the time of start-up, the determination is performed accurately and simply. Can do.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, the set value as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is set. The data stored in the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the transition to the setting change mode (setting change process) in which the change operation is valid. For this reason, the initialization of data associated with the occurrence of an abnormality in the data of the RAM 41c and the initialization of data associated with selection / setting of the set value can be performed at one time, so that useless processing can be omitted. .

  Furthermore, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state before determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is determined. When it is determined that is in the ON state, the setting shift mode is entered without determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. In this way, a new set value is selected and set without determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so that useless processing can be omitted.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, since the unused stack area and the unused area 41c-8 of the stack area 41c-6 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 are initialized for each game, the stack area 41c Even if an illegal program is stored using unused areas of the RAM 41c such as the unused stack area 41 and the unused area 41c-8 among −6, the illegal program can be prevented from being resident.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, while the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is in operation, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is always controlled by the regular bonus. ), The number of medals can be increased the fastest, so that the player's interest in the transition to the big bonus can be enhanced rather than the regular bonus operating in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the past.

  In particular, like the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) in the above-described embodiment, for example, the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus without ending the big bonus at the number of times of transition to the regular bonus, for example. When the end condition is satisfied by reaching a specified value (for example, 270 or more), the net increase in the bonus can be increased, so the player's interest is further increased with the shift to the big bonus be able to.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, the storage address of the determination value number of each lottery target role registered in the role-specific table for each gaming state may differ depending on the set value. For the combination having the same winning probability regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses is the same even if the target state of the internal lottery is the same as the game state and the addresses storing the number of determination values referenced according to the set value are different May be the same.

  In general, at the development stage, the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of determination values according to the set value for at least some of the combinations (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values from the development model in the mass production model, and the development from the initial design stage to the transition to the mass production model can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each role referred from the role-specific table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Judgment is made on whether or not there is a win. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

Second Embodiment In the first embodiment, a control signal including address information and control information is output to all of the plurality of conversion ICs, thereby controlling the electrical components connected to the conversion ICs having the same address information. Although the case has been described, control information for controlling a predetermined conversion IC connected in series with the same system wiring and controlling all the electrical components connected to the predetermined conversion IC connected with the same system wiring It is also possible to control all electrical components connected to the predetermined conversion IC by outputting fixed-length data including a control signal. Hereinafter, by outputting, as a control signal sequence, fixed-length data including control information for controlling all electrical components connected to a predetermined conversion IC connected by wiring of the same system, the predetermined An example of controlling all the electrical components connected to the conversion IC will be described.

  In the second embodiment, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170 are connected by the first system wiring, and the conversion ICs 171a and 171b mounted on the panel IC substrate 171 are the first ones. A case will be described in which the conversion IC 172a that is connected by the two systems of wiring and is mounted on the frame IC substrate 172 is connected by the third system of wiring.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment is omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment are mainly described.

  First, the drive circuit 93 mounted on the effect control board 90 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the drive circuit 93 in the second embodiment. Drive circuit 93 includes a serial output circuit 132, a serial input circuit 131, a clock signal output unit 130, an input capture signal output unit 133, and a latch signal output unit 134.

  The serial output circuit 132 is connected to the rendering device IC board 170 by a first system signal line, is connected to the panel IC board 171 by a second system signal line, and is framed by a third system signal line. It is connected to the IC substrate 172 for use.

  The serial output circuit 132 has fixed length data (4 as will be described later) for controlling the electrical components connected to all the conversion ICs mounted on the rendering device IC board 170 via the first system. Since one conversion IC is connected and the data of one conversion IC is 8 bits, at least 8 × 4 = 32-bit data) is output as a control signal, and for the panel via the second system Fixed-length data for controlling the electrical components connected to all the conversion ICs mounted on the IC substrate 171 (two conversion ICs are connected as will be described later. Since the data is 8 bits, at least 8 × 2 = 16 bits data) is output as a control signal, and is connected to all the conversion ICs mounted on the frame IC board 172 via the third system. Data of a fixed length for controlling the electrical components (at least 8 × 1 = 8 bits because one conversion IC is connected and the data of one conversion IC is 8 bits as will be described later) Are output as control signals.

  The latch signal output unit 134 takes in the data stored in the shift register of the destination conversion IC and outputs a latch signal for starting supply to the electrical component connected to the conversion IC. The latch signal output unit 134 is connected to the rendering device IC board 170 in the first system, is connected to the panel IC board 171 in the second system, and is connected to the frame IC board 172 in the third system. Yes. The latch signal output unit 134 outputs a latch signal to the conversion ICs 170a to 170d mounted on the rendering device IC board 170 via the first system, and is mounted on the panel IC board 171 via the second system. The latch signal is output to the conversion ICs 171a and 171b, and the latch signal is output to the conversion IC 172a mounted on the frame IC board 172 via the third system.

  Also in the second embodiment, the drive circuit 93 and the relay board 90a are composed of a signal line for control signals (three systems), a signal line for clock signals, and a signal line for input capture signals (for switches, Sensor), a signal line for detection signals, and a signal line for latch signals (three systems) are electrically connected by one cable.

  The control signal (data) from the serial output circuit 132 of the drive circuit 93 and the latch signal from the latch signal output unit 134 are sent to the effect device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC via the relay substrate 90a. The signal is output to the board corresponding to the system among the boards 172. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 130 of the drive circuit 93 is branched by the relay substrate 90a and is output to the effect device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172, respectively. Also, the sensor input capture signal from the input capture signal output unit 133 of the drive circuit 93 is output to the effect device IC substrate 170 via the relay substrate 90a. In addition, the switch input acquisition signal from the input acquisition signal output unit 133 of the drive circuit 93 is output to the frame IC substrate 172 via the relay substrate 90a. The detection signals from the rendering device IC board 170 and the frame IC board 172 are input to the serial input circuit 131 of the drive circuit 93 via the relay board 90a.

  58, the clock signal is indicated by a dotted line, the input signal is indicated by a one-dot chain line, the control signal is indicated by a thick solid line, the input capture signal is indicated by a long dotted line, and the latch signal is indicated by a two-dot chain line. In the following drawings, the line types corresponding to various signals are similarly shown.

  Next, wiring patterns on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172 will be described. FIG. 59 is a block diagram for explaining wiring patterns on the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172.

  The relay substrate 90a and the rendering device IC substrate 170 are a first signal line for control signals, a first signal line for latch signals, a signal line for clock signals, and an input capture. They are electrically connected by one effect device cable 176 having at least a signal line for signals and a signal line for detection signals.

  The control signal (data) input from the relay substrate 90a is input to the conversion IC 170a on the effect device IC substrate 170. The conversion ICs 170a to 170d mounted on the stage device IC substrate 170 are connected in series with the same system wiring in the order of the conversion ICs 170b, 170c, and 170d, with the conversion IC 170a being the highest level (FIG. 59). (Refer to the solid line on the IC board 170 for a production device). The connection by the same system wiring means that a plurality of conversion ICs are connected in series by a so-called bead connecting wiring. For example, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d have signal lines for control signals connected in a daisy chain type. Therefore, the input control signal is transferred in the order of the conversion ICs 170b, 170c, and 170d from the conversion IC 170a arranged at the highest level.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the data of the last bit of the shift register 682 mounted in each conversion IC is input to the data latch unit 681 of the next conversion IC (see FIG. 60). The control signal may be sequentially transferred to each conversion IC connected in series with the same system wiring.

  The latch signal input from the relay board 90a is patterned to be input to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170e in a bus form on the rendering device IC board 170 and supplied to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d (FIG. 59). (Refer to the two-dot chain line on the IC board 170 for a production device).

  Each conversion IC in the second embodiment latches the control signal at the timing when the latch signal is input, converts the latched control signal into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the connected electrical component.

  The relay substrate 90a and the panel IC substrate 171 include at least a second signal line for control signals, a signal line for clock signals, and a second signal line for latch signals. It is electrically connected by a panel cable 177.

  A control signal (data) input from the relay substrate 90a is input to the conversion IC 171a on the panel IC substrate 171. The conversion ICs 171a and 171b mounted on the panel IC substrate 171 are connected in series with the same system wiring in the order of the conversion IC 171b, with the conversion IC 171a being the higher order (on the panel IC substrate 171 in FIG. 59). (See the solid line). Therefore, the input control signal is transferred in the order of the conversion IC 171b from the conversion IC 171a arranged at the highest level.

  The latch signal inputted from the relay board 90a is patterned to be inputted to each of the conversion ICs 171a and 171b in a bus form on the panel IC board 171 and supplied to each of the conversion ICs 171a and 171b (panel of FIG. 59). (See the two-dot chain line on the IC substrate 171 for use)

  The relay substrate 90a and the frame IC substrate 172 include a third system signal line for control signals, a third system signal line for latch signals, a signal line for clock signals, and an input capture signal. Are electrically connected by one frame cable 178 having at least a signal line for detection and a signal line for detection signal.

  The latch signal input from the relay substrate 90a is patterned so as to be input and supplied to the conversion IC 172a on the frame IC substrate 172 (see the two-dot chain line on the frame IC substrate 172 in FIG. 59).

  Note that the wiring for transmitting the clock signal, the input capture signal, and the detection signal in FIG. 59 is the same as the wiring pattern described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the serial output circuit 132 in the second embodiment uses, for each system, fixed-length data for controlling all the electrical components connected to the conversion IC belonging to the system as a control signal. Output. Thereafter, the latch signal output unit 134 outputs a latch signal to the conversion IC belonging to the system at a timing after the output of the control signal. The conversion IC to which the latch signal is input is configured to convert the data stored in the shift register into parallel data and supply it to the connected electrical components.

  Next, the configuration of the conversion IC in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration of conversion ICs 170a to 170d, 171a, 171b, and 172a that supply data to electrical components in the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 60, the structure of conversion IC170a-170d mounted in IC board 170 for effect devices is shown as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 60, each of conversion ICs 170a to 170d in the second embodiment includes a data latch unit 681, a shift register 682, and a data buffer 683. As shown in FIG. 60, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d are connected in series with the same system wiring in the order of the conversion IC 170a, the conversion IC 170b, the conversion IC 170c, and the conversion IC 170d.

  The data latch unit 681 is configured by, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 681 latches the input data bit by bit at a predetermined period, for example, the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal, and outputs the latched data to the shift register 682. . The shift register 682 sequentially stores unit data, for example, data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 681. The shift register 682 shifts the stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse. By shifting the stored data one bit at a time, the shift register 682 is in a state where data is stored in all 8 bits. Further, when input data and a clock signal are input, the last bit data of the shift register 682 is converted into the subsequent stage of the conversion IC (hereinafter referred to as the lower side when the input side of the conversion IC is set as the upper side). The data latch unit 681 of the conversion IC connected to the conversion IC. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 60, the data of the last bit of the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170a is input to the data latch unit 681 of the conversion IC 170b on the lower side, and the data of the last bit of the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170b is lower. The data of the last bit in the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170c is input to the data latch unit 681 of the lower conversion IC 170d. By doing so, the serial data output from the serial output circuit 132 is transferred in the order of the conversion IC 170a, the conversion IC 170b, the conversion IC 170c, and the conversion IC 170d.

  In the second embodiment, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 outputs a control signal sequence including control information for all conversion ICs belonging to the same system to the serial output circuit 132. The serial output circuit 132 converts the control signal sequence input from the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 into serial data, and outputs the serial data to the highest conversion IC of the system.

  More specifically, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91, for example, controls information for controlling the electrical components connected to the lower conversion IC belonging to the system in a predetermined order (if the first system, Control information for controlling the electrical components connected to the conversion IC 170d, control information for controlling the electrical components connected to the conversion IC 170c, control information for controlling the electrical components connected to the conversion IC 170b, and the conversion IC 170a The control signal sequence arranged in the order of the control information for controlling the electrical components connected to (1) is output to the serial output circuit 132. The control signal train is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132 and output to the system.

  As described above, the conversion ICs belonging to the system to which the control signal string is input have the last bit data of the shift register 682 of each conversion IC input to the data latch unit 681 of the lower-order conversion IC. Data is transferred in order. When all the control signal trains are output from the serial output circuit 132, control information for controlling the electrical components connected to the conversion IC is stored in the shift register 682 of each conversion IC. Then, at the timing when the latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 134, the data is taken in by each conversion IC.

  The data buffer 683 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When a latch signal is input from the latch signal output unit 134, the data buffer 683 takes in and latches data stored in the shift register 682. The data buffer 683 supplies the captured data to the electrical components connected as parallel data (Q0 to Q7). The latch signal output unit 134 outputs the latch signal (predetermined timing) after the serial output circuit 132 starts outputting the control signal sequence and finishes outputting the control signal sequence. The timing may be any later than the time required for the control information to reach the conversion IC.

  More specifically, for example, when the effect lamp 180 is turned on, the effect lamp 181 is turned off, and the modes of the effect drive lamps 182 to 187 are changed to the mode described in FIG. Control information for controlling the motors 182b to 185b connected to the IC 170d (here, “00000000” for not rotating), control information for controlling the LEDs 182a to 187a connected to the conversion IC 170c (here, “00111111” for lighting all) , Control information for controlling the LEDs 181a to 181e connected to the conversion IC 170b (here, “00000000” for turning off all the lights), control information for controlling the LEDs 180a to 180e connected to the conversion IC 170a (here, “00011111 for turning on all the lights). )) And outputs the control signal string ( "00000000 00111111 00000000 00011111") to the serial output circuit 132. The control signal sequence is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132 and output to the first system.

  When such a control signal sequence is output, data is sequentially transferred to the conversion ICs 170a to 170d. As a result, when the output of the control signal sequence is completed, control information for controlling the LEDs 180a to 180e (here, “00011111” for lighting all) is sent to the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170a, and the LEDs 181a to 181a to the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170b are output. The control information for controlling 181e (here, “00000000” for turning off all lights) is the control information for controlling the LEDs 182a to 187a in the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170c (here, “00111111” for turning on all the lights). Control information for controlling the motors 182b to 185b (here, “00000000” for not rotating) is stored in the shift register 682. When a latch signal is input from the latch signal output unit 134, the data stored in the shift register 682 of each conversion IC is captured and supplied to the electrical components connected as parallel data (Q0 to Q7). It will be. Thus, the effect lamp 180 can be turned on, the effect lamp 181 can be turned off, and the effect drive lamps 182 to 187 can be changed to the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the effect lamp 180 is turned on and the effect lamp 181 is turned off so that the effect drive lamps 182 to 187 have the aspect described in FIG. 38B, the motor connected to the conversion IC 170d. Control information for controlling 182b to 185b (here, “000100010” for reverse rotation of motor 182b and motor 184b), control information for controlling LEDs 182a to 187a connected to conversion IC 170c (here, “00111111” for lighting all) ), Control information for controlling the LEDs 181a to 181e connected to the conversion IC 170b (here, “00000000” for turning off all the lights), and control information for controlling the LEDs 180a to 180e connected to the conversion IC 170a (here, all to turn on “ 0001111 Outputs ") control signal sequence composed of in the order of (" the 00100010 00111111 00000000 00011111 ") to the serial output circuit 132. The control signal sequence is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132 and output to the first system.

  When such a control signal sequence is output, data is sequentially transferred to the conversion ICs 170a to 170d. As a result, when the output of the control signal sequence is completed, control information for controlling the LEDs 180a to 180e (here, “00011111” for lighting all) is sent to the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170a, and the LEDs 181a to 181a to the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170b are output. The control information for controlling 181e (here, “00000000” for turning off all lights) is the control information for controlling the LEDs 182a to 187a in the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 170c (here, “00111111” for turning on all the lights). Control information for controlling the motors 182b to 185b (here, “000100010” for reverse rotation of the motor 182b and the motor 184b) is stored in the shift register 682. When a latch signal is input from the latch signal output unit 134, the data stored in the shift register 682 of each conversion IC is captured and supplied to the electrical components connected as parallel data (Q0 to Q7). It will be. Thus, the effect lamp 180 can be turned on, the effect lamp 181 can be turned off, and the effect drive lamps 182 to 187 can be changed to the embodiment described in FIG.

  The setting of the control signal sequence is performed in other processes described in the effect control process of FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process according to the second embodiment. In the serial setting process, first, the CPU 91a determines whether or not it is time to change the lamp control (lighting mode) or the motor control (driving mode) according to the game effect (step Ss951A). When it is determined that it is time to change the lamp control or the motor control, the CPU 91a stores a control signal string including control information for controlling the electrical component to be changed, in a predetermined control signal stored in the ROM 91b. Extract from the region (step Ss952A).

  In the control signal storage area, for example, a control signal sequence is stored corresponding to the type of game effect and the time elapsed since the game effect was started. In step Ss952A, a process of reading a control signal sequence specified from the elapsed timing is performed. Next, the CPU 91a sets the extracted control signal sequence in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step Ss953A). Then, a control signal string output request flag is set (step Ss954A).

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a control signal sequence including control information for controlling the electrical component to be changed is set in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, three data storage areas for storing control signal sequences are prepared individually. In other words, the output data storage area for the rendering device for storing the control signal sequence output to the conversion IC provided on the IC board 170 for the rendering device connected by the same system wiring, and the panel connected by the wiring of the same system A panel output data storage area for storing a control signal sequence output to the conversion IC provided on the IC substrate 171 and a frame for storing a control signal sequence output to the conversion IC provided on the frame IC substrate 172 Output data storage area.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial input / output process (step Ss306b) in the second embodiment. First, the CPU 91a checks whether or not the control signal string output request flag is set (step Ss970A). If set, the control signal string output request flag is reset (step Ss971A), and the control signal string stored in the data storage area is output to the serial output circuit 132 (step Ss972A). Then, the output control signal sequence is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132, and is output as a serial data method to the corresponding conversion IC via the relay board 90a. Next, the CPU 91a causes the latch signal output unit 134 to output a latch signal to the conversion IC of the system at a predetermined timing (timing at which the control signal sequence has been output) (step Ss972B).

  When the control signal sequence is stored in any one of the three data storage areas shown in FIG. 62, the CPU 91a repeatedly executes the processes of steps Ss972A and S972B a plurality of times. For example, if the control signal sequence is stored in all three data storage areas shown in FIG. 62, the CPU 91a first extracts the control signal sequence from the output data storage area for the rendering device, and the serial output circuit 132. (See step Ss972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 134 is caused to output a latch signal to the effect device IC board 170 (see step Ss972). Next, the CPU 91a extracts a control signal sequence from the panel output data storage area and outputs it to the serial output circuit 132 (see step Ss972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 134 is caused to output a latch signal to the panel IC substrate 171 (see step Ss972). Next, the CPU 91a extracts a lamp control signal from the frame output data storage area and outputs it to the serial output circuit 132 (see step Ss972A). Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the latch signal output unit 134 is caused to output a latch signal to the frame IC substrate 172 (see step Ss972).

  Note that the processes in steps Ss973 to S976 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

Next, main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described.
In the second embodiment described above, the control signal from the effect control board 90 is converted into serial data by the drive circuit 93 and output to the effect device IC board 170 or the like via the relay board 90a. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of cables connected between the effect control board 90 and the relay board 90a and the number of cables connected between the relay board 90a and the effect device IC board 170.

  Further, even when the effect device 179 is replaced with another effect device equipped with different electrical components, the conversion IC of the other effect device is connected to the effect device IC board 170 connected in series with the same system wiring. If the corresponding circuit is mounted, it is possible to control the different electrical components by connecting the other effect device to the relay board 90a using the same cable. For this reason, the replacement work required to remove the effect device 179 and replace it with another effect device can be further facilitated.

  Regarding the second embodiment described above, the same technical effect as in the case of the first embodiment described above can be obtained with the configuration based on the technical idea common to the first embodiment described above.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) The effect driving lamps 182 to 187 in the above-described embodiment drive the motors 182b to 185b to change the direction of the reflectors 182d to 187d, and from the LEDs 182a to 187a fixed at predetermined positions. The example which can change the irradiation direction of light was demonstrated. However, the configuration for changing the irradiation direction of the light from the LEDs 182a to 187a is not limited to this. For example, the driving components such as the motors 182b to 185b may be driven to change the direction of the light emitting components such as the LEDs 182a to 187a. Moreover, when comprised in this way, the reflector 182d-187d is attached to LED182a-LED187a so that the direction of reflector 182d-187d may change according to the said change by changing the direction of LED182a-LED187a. You may comprise as follows.

  As in the embodiment described above, by fixing the LEDs 182a to 187a at predetermined positions and changing the direction of the reflectors 182d to 187d, by changing the irradiation direction of the light from the LEDs 182a to 187a, While making it possible to change the irradiation direction of the light from the LEDs 182a to 187a, the wiring from the LEDs 182a to 187a can be easily routed.

  In contrast, when the direction of the LEDs 182a to 187a itself is changed by the motors 182b to 185b, the direction of the LEDs 182a to 187a can be freely changed without limitation by driving the motors 182b to 185b. Can do. For this reason, the irradiation possible range can be expanded.

  In addition, in the first slot machine, the LED is fixed and the direction of the reflector is changed by the motor to change the irradiation direction of the first method, and the direction driving of the LED itself is changed by the motor. You may comprise so that both the 2nd type production drive lamps which change a direction may be mounted. For example, the effect driving lamps 182 to 184 mounted on the left side toward the liquid crystal display 51 employ first effect driving lamps and are mounted on the right side toward the liquid crystal display 51. The effect driving lamps 185 to 187 may be configured to employ a second type of effect driving lamp.

  (2) The CPU 91a in the above-described embodiment outputs a signal (control signal, control signal string) including control information for changing the lighting mode of the LEDs 182a to 187a in accordance with the driving mode of the motors 182b to 185b. It may be configured. For example, when the driving mode of the motors 182b to 185b is a mode in which the reflectors 182d to 187d are stopped inward, the lighting modes of the LEDs 182a to 187a are blinked in the first pattern (0.5 second interval). A control signal may be output. When the driving mode of the motors 182b to 185b is a mode in which the reflectors 182d to 187d are stopped outward, the control signal may be output so that the lighting modes of the LEDs 182a to 187a are turned on. When the driving mode of the motors 182b to 185b is a mode of rotating the reflectors 182d to 187d, a control signal is sent so that the lighting mode of the LEDs 182a to 187a blinks in the second pattern (interval of 0.2 seconds). It may be output. Accordingly, the LEDs 182a to 187a can be turned on in the most effective manner in accordance with the manner of the reflectors 182d to 187d, so that the light effect can be efficiently enhanced in accordance with the gaming state. Can be improved.

  (3) On the effect device IC board 170 in the first embodiment described above, the wiring for transmitting the control signal (data) input from the relay board 90a is connected to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d in a bus format. The example which is patterned so as to be supplied to each of the conversion ICs 170a to 170d has been described. Similarly, the panel IC board 171 has been described with respect to the example in which the wiring for transmitting the control signal is patterned so as to be connected to and supplied to each conversion IC in a bus format. However, the wiring for transmitting the control signal on the board on which the conversion IC is mounted is not limited to the pattern in which the conversion IC is connected in such a bus format. For example, on the board on which the conversion IC is mounted, the wiring for transmitting the control signal is input to the uppermost one conversion IC, and thereafter patterned so as to be supplied to the other conversion ICs in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the wiring patterns of the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172 according to a modification of the first embodiment.

  For example, for the effect device IC board 170, the control signal (data) input from the relay board 90a is input to the conversion IC 170a on the effect device IC board 170, and thereafter the conversion IC 170b, the conversion IC 170c, and the conversion IC 170d in this order. Supplied. When configured in this way, each conversion IC may be configured to supply the last bit of data to the lower-order conversion IC as described in the second embodiment. Each conversion IC determines whether or not the address information specified from the input control signal is the address of the conversion IC, and when it is the address of the conversion IC, the control specified from the control signal. The conversion IC that converts the information into parallel data, supplies it to the connected electrical component, and determines that the information does not match may be configured to supply the control signal to the lower-order conversion IC.

  (4) In the second embodiment described above, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170 are converted to the conversion ICs 171a mounted on the panel IC substrate 171 by the first system wiring. 171b is connected to the second system wiring, and the conversion IC 172a mounted on the frame IC substrate 172 is connected to the third system wiring, respectively. The serial output circuit 132 and the latch signal output unit 134 are each connected. The example in which the control signal sequence and the latch signal are output from the corresponding system to the corresponding system has been described. However, the division of the system is not limited to the division for each substrate as described above, and any division may be made. For example, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d and conversion ICs 171a and 171b mounted on the rendering device IC substrate 170 and the panel IC substrate 171 are the first system wiring, and the conversion IC 172a mounted on the frame IC substrate 172 is replaced with the conversion IC 172a. You may comprise so that it may each connect by the wiring of a 2nd system | strain. Further, it is configured so that all conversion ICs are connected by one system wiring without being divided into a plurality of systems, and a control signal string and a latch for one system from the serial output circuit 132 and the latch signal output unit 134 are configured. You may comprise so that a signal may be output. In this case, in the CPU 91a, the control information for controlling all the electrical components connected to all the conversion ICs is in a predetermined order (the control information for controlling the electrical components connected to the lower-order conversion ICs is higher The control signal sequence arranged in the order of arrangement) is output to the serial output circuit 132. The control signal sequence may be converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 132 and output to the highest conversion IC.

  FIG. 65 is a block diagram for explaining the wiring patterns of the rendering device IC substrate 170, the panel IC substrate 171 and the frame IC substrate 172 according to a modification of the second embodiment. The control signal sequence output from the serial output circuit 132 via the relay substrate 90a is first input to the conversion IC 170a of the rendering device IC substrate 170 with reference to, for example, the thick solid line in FIG. Thereafter, after being supplied to the conversion IC 170b, the conversion IC 170c, and the conversion IC 170d, it is returned to the relay board 90a again and input to the conversion IC 171a of the panel IC board 171. Then, after being supplied to the conversion IC 171b, it is returned to the relay board 90a again and supplied to the conversion IC 172a of the frame IC board 172. In addition, as described in the second embodiment, each conversion IC sequentially inputs the data of the last bit of the shift register 682 of each conversion IC into the data latch unit 681 of the lower-order conversion IC. Data is transferred. As a result, when all the control signal trains have been output from the serial output circuit 132, the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, the conversion ICs 171a and 171b, and the shift register 682 of the conversion IC 172a are controlled to control the electrical components connected to the conversion IC. The control information is stored. A latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 134 at the timing after the output of all the control signal trains from the serial output circuit 132, and data is captured by the conversion ICs 170a to 170d, the conversion ICs 171a and 171b, and the conversion IC 172a. , Supplied to each electrical component. As a result, the drive circuit 93 and the relay board 90a can be connected using cables each including one system of signal lines for outputting control signal strings and latch signals from the serial output circuit 132 and the latch signal output unit 134. Therefore, the number of cables can be reduced.

  (5) As the lighting mode of the LED which is the light emitting component in the above-described embodiment, the lighting mode and the lighting mode have been described as examples. However, the lighting mode is not limited to this, and may include a gradation for lighting. Specifically, an LED that performs gradation control (for example, a multi-color LED) may be used as the LED so that the brightness can be controlled. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse train supplied to the LED when performing gradation control of the LED. FIG. 66 shows a pulse train in the case where the gradation of the LED is controlled in eight steps. That is, as shown in FIG. 66, the CPU 91a controls the gradation of the LEDs by outputting a signal in which the number of pulses is changed according to the luminance. In this case, for example, the period of the clock signal is set as one time element, and one control unit time is constituted by seven time elements. Then, the brightness of the LED may be controlled depending on how many time elements for supplying the pulse current in one control unit time are included. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the LED brightness is brightest when a pulse current is passed through the LED in all the time elements among the seven time elements in one control unit time. In addition, as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the brightness of the LED is the darkest when a pulse current is passed through the LED for only one time element among the seven time elements in one control time. Further, as the number of time elements for applying a pulse current to the LED decreases to 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2, the brightness of the LED gradually decreases (FIGS. 66 (b) to (f)). . As shown in FIG. 66 (h), when the pulse current is not allowed to flow through the LED in all seven time elements included in one control unit time, the LED is turned off.

  In the case of performing LED gradation control, the CPU 91a uses a serial output circuit 132 as a serial data method to generate a control signal including information on the number of pulses corresponding to the luminance (for example, logical value 0 or 1). Output. The CPU 91a is not limited to the number of pulses, and may output a control signal including information on a pulse width corresponding to the luminance as a serial data system using the serial output circuit 132.

  In the above modification, gradation control is performed by outputting a signal with the number of pulses changed. However, other methods may be used as long as a signal with a pulse amount changed is output. Gradation control may be performed using this. For example, the CPU 91a may perform gradation control of the LED by outputting a signal with a changed pulse width.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, replay (2) is an advantageous RT winning, and when an advantageous RT winning occurs, an advantageous RT that is advantageous for a player whose winning probability of replay (1) is extremely high The example controlled by (RT4) has been described. However, multiple types of advantageous RT prizes and advantageous RTs may be set. And you may comprise so that it may be controlled by advantageous RT according to the kind of produced advantageous RT prize. In this case, the plurality of types of advantageous RTs may be game states in which at least one of the prescribed number of games and the winning probability of replay (1) is different. Moreover, you may comprise so that the winning probability of an advantageous RT prize may be improved when it is RT1-RT3. This makes it possible to make the player have a different expectation of which advantageous RT prize is generated, and in particular, to improve the interest of the game when controlled by RT1 to RT3.

  In the case of the above configuration, when the advantageous RT winning is won in the internal lottery and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times the advantageous RT winning is won after being controlled by RT1 to RT3 is predetermined). When it is less than the number of times, it may be configured to notify the type of the advantageous RT prize when the determination is made to randomly draw and notify whether or not to notify. Further, the advantageous RT winning may be a winning that can occur depending on a player's operation procedure, when the player can withdraw and when the player cannot withdraw. In this case, an operation procedure (such as a stop timing) for generating the advantageous RT prize may be further notified.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, replay (3) is regarded as an unfavorable RT prize, and when a disadvantage RT prize is generated, the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than the initial gaming state, but compared with RT4. In the case described above, the example is controlled to the disadvantageous RT (RT5) which is disadvantageous for the extremely low player. However, multiple types of disadvantage RT prizes and disadvantage RTs may be set. And you may comprise so that it may be controlled by disadvantageous RT according to the kind of disadvantageous RT prize which generate | occur | produced. In this case, the plurality of types of disadvantage RTs may be game states in which at least one of the prescribed number of games and the winning probability of replay (1) is different. Moreover, you may comprise so that the winning probability of a disadvantageous RT prize may be improved when it is RT1-RT3.

  In the case of the above configuration, when the disadvantageous RT prize is won in the internal lottery and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times the disadvantageous RT prize is won after being controlled by RT1 to RT3 is predetermined). When it is less than the number of times, it may be configured to notify the type of the disadvantage RT prize when it is determined whether to notify at random or not. Also, the disadvantageous RT prize may be a prize that can occur depending on a player's operation procedure, when the player can withdraw and when the player cannot withdraw. In this case, an operation procedure (such as a stop timing) for generating the disadvantageous RT prize may be further notified.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, after RT1 to RT5 are started, RT1 to RT5 are terminated when the bonus is won or the specified number of games is reached, and RT1 to RT3 are further replayed (2) Or the example which is terminated when Replay (3) wins has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined winning combination may be defined as a falling combination, and the controlled RT may be terminated when the falling combination wins or wins. In addition, the RT1 to RT5 may not be provided with the prescribed number of games, and after the RT has started, the RT may be ended when a bonus is won or when a falling combination is won or won. In this case, the probability of winning the winning combination or the probability of winning may be configured to differ depending on the type of RT.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, RT1 to RT3 have been described with respect to an example in which the prescribed number of games to be controlled is common (5000 games). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT1 to RT3 have a specified number of games corresponding to the type of RT (for example, the specified number of games for RT1 is 5000 games, the specified number of games for RT2 is 3000 games, and the specified number of games for RT3) May be set as 100 games or the like.

  Further, RT4 and RT5 have been described as examples in which the prescribed number of games to be controlled is common (200 games). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT4 and RT5 are set with the number of games corresponding to the type of RT as the prescribed number of games (for example, the prescribed number of games of RT4 is 500 games, the prescribed number of games of RT5 is 300 games, etc.). It may be.

  (10) As described with reference to FIGS. 15B to 15D, RT1 to RT3 in the above-described embodiment are examples in which the probability of winning the replay (2) is different from the probability of winning the replay (3). explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT1 to RT3 may have different probabilities of winning the replay (2) and at least one of the probabilities of winning the replay (3). For example, RT1 to RT3 may have the same probability of winning replay (3), but may differ only in the probability of winning replay (2). In addition, RT1 to RT3 may have the same probability of winning replay (2), and may differ only in the probability of winning replay (3).

  (11) In the above embodiment, when the bonus and the replay are won simultaneously, the control for aligning the replay is performed with priority over the control for aligning the bonus. For this reason, during RT, even if a bonus is won, control is made so that it is difficult to win a bonus. Thus, the RT is controlled so that it is difficult to end the RT due to the bonus winning. In order to control the RT so that it is difficult to end due to the bonus winning, the following reel control may be performed. For example, in the table index corresponding to the case where only the bonus is won and the gaming state is RT1 to RT5, the number of drawn-in frames is determined so that the winning bonus symbols are not aligned on the winning line. Alternatively, the address of the table creation data may be stored so that reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the winning bonus symbols are not aligned on the winning line, so that the bonus is won and RT1 to RT5 are prevented from ending. Can do.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, the special bonus winning is described with the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus as an example. However, special transition prizes are not limited to these. The special transfer prize may be, for example, a challenge bonus in which the maximum stop delay time from the operation of a predetermined stop button until the corresponding reel stops rotating is shortened to 75 milliseconds.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, RT4 has been described as an advantageous gaming state. However, the advantageous gaming state is not limited to RT. For example, the advantageous gaming state may be an AT (Assist Time) for notifying by a lamp or the like when a predetermined winning combination is won in the internal lottery. Further, the advantageous gaming state is not limited to one type of gaming state. For example, the advantageous game state may be a game state selected from a plurality of types of game states with different end conditions according to the game state before transition (any one of RT1 to RT3). In addition, the advantageous game state is a game state (RT1 to RT3) before the transition from a plurality of types of game states having different degrees of advantage for the player (replaying role winning probability, small role winning probability, special role winning probability, etc.). Or a gaming state selected according to ()).

  (14) Operation unit provided in the slot machine 1 (start lever 7, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, settlement switch 10, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, selection switch 56, determination switch 57, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, etc.) may be detected so that the RT state can be initialized (the value of the gaming state flag is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state). For example, the specific operation may be a combination of predetermined operations of two or more operation units. However, the procedure may be completely different from the operation related to the setting change. The operation procedure may be a combination of other operations including some operations.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is won before the power interruption, the CPU 41a indicates that the special role is won. An example has been described in which a power-on command is transmitted, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, a notification effect indicating that the special role is won is executed. However, not only a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, but also a notification effect that notifies the game state to be returned may be executed. For example, when the game state to be returned is the initial game state, the CPU 41a may transmit a power-on command indicating the initial game state and execute a notification effect indicating the initial game state to the sub-control unit 91. Good. Further, when the game state to be returned is RT, the CPU 41a may transmit a power-on command indicating the RT type and execute a notification effect indicating the RT type to the sub-control unit 91. . The gaming state to be restored may be all controlled gaming states (for example, initial gaming state, RT1 to RT5, bonus, etc.), and a predetermined gaming state (for example, controlled gaming state) , Initial gaming state, RT1 to RT5, bonus, etc., initial gaming state and bonus only).

  In addition, as a notification device, a dedicated notification device may be provided, or the credit display device 11, the game auxiliary display device 12, the payout display device 13, and the sub control unit 91 that are directly controlled by the main control unit 41 control. You may utilize the indicator used in progress of games, such as the liquid crystal display 51. FIG.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 in S603 of FIG. In the above, an example is described in which return control is performed in which it is determined that the BET number is not settled and the credit is settled based on the value of the credit counter. That is, the example in which the release control and the return control are performed separately and independently has been described. However, the release control and the return control may be performed by a single operation. For example, when the settlement switch 10 is operated, the release control and the return control may be performed based on the values of the BET counter and the credit counter. The release control is not limited to paying out medals corresponding to the number of BETs, but may be anything that can release the number of BETs, such as adding a BET number to a credit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the betting amount and credits can be settled by one settlement switch 10, that is, when the betting amount is set, the number of medals corresponding to the betting amount is returned. It functions as a switch, and when there are both bets and credits, it functions as a switch that returns only the number of medals corresponding to credits. However, it is possible to return the bets and credits with separate switches. It may be.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, a method for regulating connector removal by attaching the connector regulating member 500 to the board case 200 is a cable 600a for connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110; Although applied to the connector connection with the game control board 40, other connector connections, for example, the connector connection between the operation part relay board 110 and the cable 600a, the cable for connecting the operation part relay board 110 and the game electronic component Connector connection between 601a-g and operation unit relay board 110, cable 600b connecting game control board 40 and reel relay board 120, connector connection between game control board 40, connector between reel relay board 120 and cable 600b Connection, cable 601 for connecting the reel relay board 120 and the game electronic component -M and the connector connection between the operation unit relay board 110, the cable 600c connecting the game control board 40 and the power supply board 100, the connector connection between the game control board 40, the connector connection between the power supply board 100 and the cable 600c, the power supply A cable 601n for connecting the board 100 and the gaming electronic component, a connector connection between the power supply board 100 and o, a cable 600d for connecting the game control board 40 and the effect relay board 80, and a connector connection between the game control board 40; For connecting the effect relay board 80 and the cable 600d, connecting the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90, connecting the cable 601p and the effect relay board 80, connecting the cable 600p and the effect control board 90, etc. You may apply. That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of gaming electronic components are connected to the game control board via the relay board, all of the connector connection portions on the relay board side to which the gaming electronic component side cable and the game control board side cable are connected, The restriction method may be applied without omission to all connector connection portions on the game control board side to which the relay board side cable is connected.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors has been described. It is preferable to attach a covering member that covers the electronic parts to be performed and the connection points between the electronic parts and the cables so that they cannot be accessed from the outside. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent instrument such as a driving instrument from being attached to the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable for performing the above. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the connector restriction member 500 is configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restriction member 500 is removed from the board case 200, and the connector The removal restriction can be released. For example, when the connector restriction member 500 is once attached to the board case 200, the connector case 500 or a part of the connector restriction member 500 must be destroyed unless the connector is broken. The restriction member 500 may be removed from the board case 200 so that the restriction on the removal of the connector cannot be released.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the connector regulating member 500 includes the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520. After the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. With the connector connected, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member 510, so that the connector can be prevented from being removed. By attaching the formed connector restricting member 500 to the substrate case 200, the connector can be prevented from being removed.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the connector restricting member 500 is used as the method for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case has been described. It may be a method.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which continuous game sound effects are continuously generated over a plurality of games during execution of bonus effects and continuous effects has been described. Different sound effects (music, etc.) may be used during the middle performance and during the continuous performance. As the continuous game sound effect, a continuous game sound effect that is continuously output over a plurality of games has been applied, but a continuous game sound effect that is continuously output over one game, that is, a game If, for example, a continuous game sound effect is output after the game is finished, after the game is finished, for example, after one game is finished, the next and subsequent games are started. For example, after one game is completed, at least until the next game can be started (until a predetermined number of bets are set). (B) Includes continuous sounds.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, when the sound effect volume is lowered, the sound volume is reduced from the maximum (MAX) to level 0 (silence). However, for example, the volume may be gradually reduced. (Fade out), the volume may be decreased stepwise according to the elapsed time. Furthermore, when the game is resumed, the volume may be gradually increased, or the volume may be increased in stages according to the elapsed time.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of performing the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect from the maximum (MAX) to level 0 as the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine, for example, The volume of the sound effect may be controlled to a volume lower than the maximum, or when lowering, if the volume is lowered to a volume lower than the current volume, the volume level is not necessarily 0, that is, the sound is not muted. Alternatively, the volume may be lowered to a level 0 or higher as long as the volume does not bother nearby players. In addition, the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine is not limited to the control for lowering the volume, but the control for stopping the output of the sound effect, or other music (for example, music with a quiet volume, slow music) Etc.) may be performed.

  (25) In the above embodiment, when the set value is changed, all the data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the stack area being used. However, in order to initialize the data in the RAM 41c, a separate initialization operation is performed when changing the set value (for example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned ON, a data clear reset / It may be necessary to operate the setting switch 38). From the RAM abnormal error state, it may be possible to recover not only by simply changing the set value but also by initializing the data in the RAM 41c. Specifically, after a determination of YES in step S103 in FIG. 18, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by this step. When it is determined that the process has been performed, the process may proceed to step S109.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, all data in the RAM 41c are initialized except for the stack area in use in addition to the set value work 41c-4 in accordance with the change of the set value. . However, not only the data in the RAM 41c other than the stack area being used is initialized in accordance with the change of the set value as described above, but an initialization operation separate from the operation for changing the set value. As a result of (for example, operation of the reset / setting switch 38), all data in the RAM 41c is initialized except for the setting value work 41c-4 and the stack area being used, and as the setting value is changed. Thus, a new set value may be stored in the set value work 41c-4.

  Specifically, after step S102 of FIG. 18 is performed, a step for determining whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is operated is provided, and the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by the step. When the determination is made, a process of initializing all data in the RAM 41c except for the set value work 41c-4 and the stack area in use is performed, and whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state is determined. Processing to determine is performed, and when the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state by the processing, the process proceeds to step S110, and when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, processing for canceling the prohibition of interruption is performed. The game control process may be performed. Note that, when the reset / setting switch 38 is not operated, the process may proceed to step S104. Thereby, it is possible to recover from the RAM abnormal error state by initializing the data in the RAM 41c by performing not only the setting value changing operation but also the initialization operation. Further, from the RAM abnormality error state excluding the set value abnormality, the data in the RAM 41c can be initialized and restored by performing only the initialization operation.

  (27) In the above embodiment, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (each symbol) are defined for one reel, and each region (region number) is defined as a stop control table. ), A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, a stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area in which one symbol varies. The reel stop control is performed by using, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) for each area less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. Reel stop control may be performed using a uniquely determined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor. Ri, it is possible to further diversify the stop position relative to the stop operation position. Also in this case, similarly to the selection of the stop control table in the above embodiment, it is possible to obtain an effect that the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  (28) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table is added to the random number for internal lottery, and when an overflow occurs as a result of the addition, Was supposed to win. On the other hand, the acquired number of determination values may be sequentially subtracted from the acquired internal lottery random value, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new internal lottery random value. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  (29) In the above embodiment, the internal lottery is performed by sequentially adding the number of determination values of each combination corresponding to the game situation to the acquired random value for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows The role was determined to be a winner. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is also possible to perform an internal lottery by comparing the value of each with the determination value of each combination.

  (30) In the above embodiment, the determination value number storage area stores a determination value number in each case using a 2-byte area. However, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for a special combination cannot be set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. Thus, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  (31) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values is stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 or individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 4 . However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 4 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 3-4, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  (32) In the above embodiment, the variable display device 2 includes the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in which a plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portion, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate. The symbols are variably displayed by driving. However, a device that virtually displays a symbol on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be used instead of the variable display device 2 described above.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 in accordance with the command for writing the effect data from the sub-control unit 91, and the effect data in the temporary storage memory 155. It was supposed to be transferred to the area. Then, when the image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156, the effect data transferred to the effect data area is read. However, development of the image data in the frame buffer memory 156 is performed by an effect start command different from the command for transferring the effect data from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. On the other hand, if there is no effect continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games as a continuous effect as an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the CGROM 142 is used when starting each effect. The effect data can be transferred to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 and the expansion of the image data to the frame buffer memory 156 can be started as it is, and the CPU 91a can output a command to the VDP 141 only once. In particular, if the display frequency is high, such as an image according to the effect mode, it is convenient to make it resident in the temporary storage memory 155.

  (35) In the above embodiment, the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains. The stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating, and the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel or the stopped reel) Stop operation position) Another stop control table is registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and based on the table index, the required stop control table is specified according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop state. Enabled, when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel is stopped and the reel is still rotating. When there are still, by referring to the table index may be set a stop control table for each rotating reel.

  (36) In the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of draw-in frames for the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each gaming state, the reel stop state (and the stopped state) The stop control table uniquely determined for the reel stop position or the stopped reel stop operation position) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. A plurality of stop position specification tables that uniquely define stop positions are used in place of the stop control table, and when a stop operation is detected, the stop position specification table is referred to and unique corresponding to the stop operation position. Control may be performed to stop the reel at the stop position specified in FIG.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that are uniquely determined for the respective internal winning status of each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the number of frames to be pulled in, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. Kicking control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. By performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position). Therefore, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  (37) In the above embodiment, each game state is uniquely determined for each internal winning state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). The selected control pattern is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern. At least the control pattern determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the selected control pattern is selected. As long as the reel stop control is performed according to the above.

  (38) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device for paying out a game ball, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (39) The effect control board 90 described in the above-described embodiment may be mounted on a main body unit that is a casing or a front door of the slot machine 1, or an effect unit that is an effect device 179. It may be one mounted on. Whether it is mounted on the main unit or on the effect unit, the effect control board 90, the effect device IC board 170, the panel IC board 171, and the frame IC board By configuring so that 172 communicates with a serial signal as in the above-described embodiment, the same technical effect as in the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  (40) The conversion IC in the above-described second embodiment has been described with respect to the example in which the control signal is supplied to the connected electrical component at the timing when the latch signal from the effect control board 90 is input. The timing at which the control signal is supplied is not limited to such a timing, and for example, the control signal may be supplied at a timing when a predetermined time elapses in each conversion IC. Specifically, timing may be started after the control signal is input to the conversion IC, and the control signal may be supplied at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, the reflecting umbrella that reflects the light from the LED is described as an example of the changing member that changes the irradiation direction of the light from the LED. However, the changing member is not limited to this as long as it changes the irradiation direction of the light from the LED. For example, only one direction of the light from the LED is allowed to pass or transmit, and the other direction. You may comprise by the member which does not permeate | transmit or permeate | transmit.

(42) A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game using game values (medals, credits). The display result is derived to the variable display device that displays the identification information of the game in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine (slot machine 1) that can generate a prize according to the display result derived to the variable display device. ) And
A game control board on which a wiring pattern is formed and which has a connector (board-side connector 620a) that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and on which game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted (Game control board 40),
The game includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components (introduction medal sensor 31);
A relay board having a first connector (connector 621a) and a second connector (connector 622g) for connecting cables, and relaying signal input / output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board (Operation unit relay board 110);
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable (cable 600a) connected to
A second cable (cable 601g) having a connector connected to the second connector on the relay board side at one end, and the gaming electrical component connected to the other end;
Light emitting components (LEDs 182a to 187a);
A changing member (reflecting umbrellas 182d to 187d) for changing the irradiation direction of the light emitted by the light emitting component;
A movable part (motors 182b to 185b) for moving the change member to change the light irradiation direction;
Effect control means (CPU 91a, drive circuit 93, effect device IC board 170) for controlling the light emitting component and the movable component;
Connector connection part (connector 620a, connector 610a part) between the first cable and the game control board, connector connection part (connector 611a, connector 621a part) between the first cable and the relay board, and the second cable Each of the connector connection portions (connector 622g, connector 612g portion) to the relay board is in a connection release restriction state that cannot be released unless the release restriction portion related to the connector connection is destroyed (connector restriction member 500). 650).
According to such a configuration, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the game control board, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the relay board, and a connector connection between the second cable and the relay board. Each of the portions is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connector connection is destroyed, so in any of the three connector connection parts on the game control board and the relay board, Unauthorized devices such as driving tools cannot be connected without leaving traces. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible.
In addition, by performing control to cause the light emitting component to emit light and move the movable component by the effect control means, it is possible to diversify the light irradiation direction, and to enhance the interest of the game by the light effect.
( 43 ) It should be noted that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a drive circuit. 4 is a block diagram for explaining a conversion IC mounted on each of the rendering device IC substrate, the panel IC substrate, and the frame IC substrate. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the electrical component connected to conversion IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the conversion IC which supplies the data to an electrical component. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from a serial output circuit. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of conversion IC which outputs a detection signal. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the supply line of the backup power supply with respect to a main control part. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the display control circuit mounted in the production control board. It is a figure which shows the storage area of RAM in a game control board. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the storage area of the number of judgment values. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM in a game control board. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM abnormality error process which the control part in a game control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game control process which the control part in a game control board performs for every game. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a BET process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payment process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a reel rotation process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a winning determination process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows a payout process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process which the sub control part in an effect control board performs. It is a flowchart which shows an effect initial setting process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control recovery process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows production control interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect backup process in detail. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control process and a volume control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the lamp control signal and motor control signal of an output object are set. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial input / output process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lighting aspect about LED which comprises the lamp for an effect drive, and the driving aspect about a motor. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lighting aspect about LED which comprises the lamp for an effect drive, and the driving aspect about a motor. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the game effect and light effect performed according to a game state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a volume adjustment process. It is a figure which shows the state which removed the direction device from the front door. It is a figure which shows the state which attaches another production | presentation apparatus to a front door. It is a figure showing the front view of the slot machine in the state where another production device was attached to the front door. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cap which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 51, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cap with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 53, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 56, (b) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the drive circuit in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining wiring patterns on an effect device IC substrate, a panel IC substrate, and a frame IC substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the conversion IC which supplies the data to the electrical component in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the serial setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the control signal sequence containing the control information for controlling the electrical component of change object in 2nd Embodiment is set. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the serial input / output process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating each wiring pattern of the IC board for effect devices in the modification of 1st Embodiment, the IC board for panels, and the IC board for frames. It is a block diagram for demonstrating each wiring pattern of the IC board for effect devices, the IC board for panels, and the IC board for frames in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the pulse train supplied to LED when performing gradation control of LED.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal display , 60a, 60b effect door, 90 effect control board, 91 sub-control unit, 91a CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 93 drive circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frames Buffer memory, 170 Production device IC substrate, 171 Panel IC substrate, 172 Frame IC substrate, 179 Production device, 180, 181 Production lamp, 182-187 Production drive lamp, 200 Substrate case, 250 Mounting base, 500 Connector regulations Control member, 510 mounting side member, 520 connector cover.

Claims (8)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is derived to a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information in a variable manner. 1 is a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device,
A game control board on which a wiring pattern is formed and has a connector that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and on which a game control means for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
A production device for performing a predetermined production;
An effect control board that is communicably connected to the game control board and is equipped with effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect device based on reception of control information transmitted from the game control means,
A game that includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of a game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components,
A relay board having a first connector and a second connector for connecting a cable, and relaying signal input and output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board;
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable connected to the
Having a connector connected to the second connector on the relay board side at one end, and the second cable to which the first electronic component is connected to the other end;
The game control means includes
The microcomputer which comprises the said game control means has a storage area which memorize | stores the data for operation so that reading and writing are possible, and it is memorize | stored in this storage area even if the power supply to the said slot machine stops Game data storage means capable of holding data;
Prior determination means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a special winning accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player before the display result of the variable display device is derived When,
When the decision to permit the generation of any winning is made by the pre-determining means, the decision information indicating the decision to allow the occurrence of the winning is allocated to the storage area of the game data storage means Decision information setting means for setting in the determined decision information storage area;
Derivation control means for deriving the display result of the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
When the decision information setting means sets special decision information indicating the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize in the decision information storage area, and when the permitted special prize has not occurred, the special decision information Carry-over means to carry over after the next game,
Game storage data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the game data storage means is normal when the game control means is activated;
Game initialization means for initializing data stored in the game data storage means including the decision information storage area based on a predetermined initialization operation;
When the data stored in the game data storage means including the decision information storage area is initialized by the game initialization means, initialization information indicating the fact is given to the effect control means as the control information. Initialization information transmitting means for transmitting to
When the game storage data determination means determines that the data stored in the game data storage means is normal, the control state of the game control means based on the data stored in the game data storage means Game control state return processing means for executing game control state return processing for returning
Special determination state determination means for determining whether or not special determination information is stored in the determination information storage area when the game control state return processing means returns the control state of the game control means;
When the game control state return processing means returns the control state of the game control means, return information capable of specifying the determination result by the special determination state determination means is transmitted to the effect control means as the control information. Including return information transmitting means
The production control means includes
The microcomputer that constitutes the effect control means has a storage area for storing data for operation so as to be readable and writable, and is stored in the storage area even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped Production data storage means capable of holding data;
Effect storage data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the effect data storage means is normal when the effect control means is activated;
An effect initialization means for initializing the effect data storage means when it is determined by the effect storage data determination means that the data stored in the effect data storage means is not normal;
When the data stored in the effect data storage means is determined to be normal by the effect storage data determination means, the control state of the effect control means based on the data stored in the effect data storage means Effect control state return processing means for executing effect control state return processing for returning
After the production control means is activated, other control information different from the initialization information and the return information is received until the initialization information or the return information transmitted at the time of activation of the game control means is received. However, the control state of the effect control unit is set on the condition that the control unit waits without performing control according to the other control information and receives the initialization information or the return information transmitted from the game control unit. Output starting means for starting the output of the production by the production device based on,
Notification control for receiving the return information and informing the effect device that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted when the return information specifies that the special decision information is stored. And a start-up notification control means for performing
Each of the connector connection part between the first cable and the game control board, the connector connection part between the first cable and the relay board, and the connector connection part between the second cable and the relay board is connected to the connector. It is in a connection release restriction state that can not be released unless the release restriction part related to is destroyed ,
The first electronic component connected to the second cable whose connector connection portion with the relay board is in the connection release restricted state outputs a signal for starting the variable display on the variable display device according to the operation. A slot machine, characterized in that it is a starting operation means . The stage device includes a light-emitting component, and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction,
The effect control means performs control to move the movable part so as to change the light irradiation direction to a direction toward a player who plays a game in the slot machine and a direction toward a direction different from the player direction. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein: The stage device includes a light-emitting component, and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction,
3. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect control unit performs control of causing the light-emitting component to emit light in a lighting manner corresponding to an irradiation direction of light that is changed by the movable component. The stage device includes a light-emitting component, and a movable component that moves the light-emitting component to change the light irradiation direction,
The slot machine is composed at least of a main unit that is used in common among a plurality of models, and an effect unit that is installed in an installation section provided in the main unit and used uniquely for the model,
The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the light emitting component and the movable component are attached to the effect unit. The production device includes production electrical parts attached to the main unit,
The effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal in a serial signal system in order to control the light-emitting component and / or the movable part and the electric component for the effect,
The slot machine further includes a conversion output circuit for a main unit equipped with conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method and outputting the converted signal to the electrical parts for presentation.
A conversion output circuit for a production unit equipped with a conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputting the connected light emitting component and / or the movable component,
The output means outputs the control signal to each of the conversion output means mounted in the main body unit conversion output circuit and the rendering unit conversion output circuit, and converts the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system. To output a conversion signal for specifying the conversion output means to be output to each of the conversion output means mounted in the conversion output circuit for the main unit and the conversion output circuit for the effect unit,
The conversion output means mounted in the main unit conversion output circuit and the rendering unit conversion output circuit respectively determine whether or not the conversion output means is a conversion output means specified from the specifying signal. ,
The conversion output means determined not to be the conversion output means specified from the specifying signal does not output the control signal input together with the specifying signal to a connected component,
The conversion output means determined to be the conversion output means specified from the specifying signal converts the control signal input together with the specifying signal from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method and is connected to a connected component. 5. The slot machine according to claim 4, wherein the slot machine outputs. The production device includes production electrical parts attached to the main unit,
The effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal in a serial signal system in order to control the light-emitting component and / or the movable part and the electric component for the effect,
The slot machine further includes a conversion output circuit for a main unit equipped with conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal method to a parallel signal method and outputting the converted signal to the electrical parts for presentation.
A conversion output circuit for a production unit equipped with a conversion output means for converting the control signal from a serial signal system to a parallel signal system and outputting the connected light emitting component and / or the movable component,
The output means includes
A main unit output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electric parts for production to the conversion output circuit for the main unit in a serial signal system;
Production unit output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the light emitting component and / or the movable component to the production unit conversion output circuit in a serial signal system,
At least the conversion output means mounted on the conversion output circuit for the production unit is connected in series with the same system wiring,
The production unit output means outputs fixed-length data including control signal information for controlling all the components connected to the conversion output means of the same system in a predetermined unit for each predetermined period. Output to the highest conversion output means of the same system in the system,
The conversion output means of the same system respectively transfer a predetermined unit of control signal input every predetermined cycle as it is to the conversion output means connected to the lower side, and input the predetermined unit of control signal. 5. The slot machine according to claim 4, wherein the slot machine converts the serial signal system to the parallel signal system at a predetermined timing and outputs the converted signal to a connected component. A board case for housing the game control board;
A regulating member provided separately from the board case and configured to prevent the connection between the connector on the game control board housed in the board case and the connector of the first cable when attached to the board case; ,
A connection means for connecting the main body of the slot machine and the substrate case so that the substrate case cannot be removed from the main body of the slot machine unless a predetermined removal restricting portion is destroyed,
The connecting member is connected to the substrate case and the main body of the slot machine, and restricting member removal restricting means for restricting removal of the restricting member from the substrate case is configured. The slot machine according to claim 6. A mounting portion provided at a peripheral position of the connector on the game control board side;
When attached to the attachment part, with a special member that makes separation from the attachment part impossible unless the predetermined separation restriction site is destroyed,
By attaching the special member to the attachment portion in a state where the connector on the first cable side is connected to the connector on the game control board side, a part of the special member extends in the direction of removing the connector on the first cable side. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the slot machine is disposed at an overlapping position and restricts movement of the connector on the first cable side in the pulling direction.

Images